Home

Setup Manual NT631 and NT631C - Support

1. CS1W SCU21 CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 10CD0 CPM1A 20CD0 CPM1A 30CDL1 CPM1A 40CDL CPM2A 30CDLIL CPM2A 40CDLILI CPM2A 60CDLIL CPM2C 10 O CPM2C 20 CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 EV1 CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1H CPU11 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 CS1G CPU42 E CS1G CPU44 E CS1H CPU63 E CS1H CPU65 E CS1H CPU67 E V1 C200HS CPU21 E EC C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CS1G CPU43 E CS1G CPU45 E CS1H CPU64 E CS1H CPU66 E Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 SRM1 C02 V2 Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A XW2Z 200T 9 pin 9 pin 2 m XW2Z 500T 9 pin lt 9 pin 5 m CPUs of CVM1 CV series PCs without the suffix EVL cannot be connected by any connection method Serial Port A B NT631 NT631C PC Host link unit 1 6 onnector TT O interface z O RS 232C O interface O fe Q W La 9 pin type 9 pin type 5 9 Wiring for a Memory Link Cables with connect
2. RS 232C side D SUB 9P CASE RS 422A 485 side p POWER RS 422A 485 Dr Rec 8P terminal block rise REDE LED DC DC Convertor Aas il 5 V 6 OW Ds af FG A L L REG IS OV SG 9 pn pa J j 2 SG Photocoupler 7 t RS 232C R fR i 3 spp Dr R _Dr Rec_ i L i asl spa aai Sse ONET pie o SW1 3 swi 4 SD 2 lt 1 sw1 5 Zy A 5 RDB Rs 4 6 RDA ae 5 So y KN Terminator ih SW1 2 7 RS 422A Dr DR a et 7 csp 8 gt 8 CSA ER 258 Appendix D Transporting and Storing the NT631 NT631C e When transporting the NT631 NT631C use the packaging intended for it e When storing the NT631 NT631C observe the following conditions Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C Storage ambient humidity 35 to 85 259 Appendix E Making the Cable The procedure for making up the cable is described below Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS 422A 485 type connections Cable Preparation The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG Cable with Shielding Wire Connected to FG 1 2 3 1 2 Oo oR Ww Cut the cable to the required length Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath Cut back the shielding
3. CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 10CD0 CPM1A 20CD0 CPM1A 30CDL1 CPM1A 40CDL1 CPM2A 30CDLIL CPM2A 40CDLIL1 CPM2A 60CDLIL CPM2C 10 CPM2C 20 SRM1 C02 V2 Connect to the PC through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter RDA TRM RDB SDA SDB JAAA RSA NT631 NT631C side RS 422A reviation Short circuit tool PLC side ielding wire i j RDB 9 pin type OOOO In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 422A cable Wiring When Connecting a CS1 series CS1G H Serial Communications Board C series C200HX HG HE Z E Communication Board CQM1H Seri al Communications Board or CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit Applicable units CS1G CPU42 CS1G CPU44 CS1H CPU63 EV1 EV1 EV1 CS1G CPU43 EV1 CS1G CPU45 EV1 CS1H CPU64 EV1 113 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 114 CS1H CPU65 EV1 CS1H CPU67 EV1 C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE CQM1H CPUS51 CS1H CPU66 EV1 C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU85 ZE CQM1H CPU61 CV500 LK201 communication port 2 RDA NT631 NT631C side iat
4. previous screen Display Contents of The First Screen Item Meaning Screen Data Type The host type set for the screen data PT Control Area Word at the host to which the PT status control area is allo cated PT Notification Area Word at the host to which the PT status notify area is allo cated Window Control Word at the host to which the window control area is allo Area cated Numeric Expression Default for the method of interpretation of the contents of host words to which numeral memory tables are allocated numeric value storage method Expansion I F Type of unit installed at the expansion interface connector Compatibility Sets whether or not to use NT30 620 compatible mode for screen data Sets whether to operate as a normal NT31 631 or emulate many key NT30 620 characteristics Display Contents of The Second Screen Meaning Comm Port A Communication type set for serial port A fixed as RS 232C Comm Method Communication method set for serial port A Comm Setting Communication conditions set for serial port A display con tents differ according to the communication method Display Contents of The Third Screen Meaning Comm Port B Communication type set for serial port B RS 232C RS 422A Comm Method Communication method set for serial port B Comm Setting Communication settings set for serial port B display con tents differ accordin
5. 148 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 NT Link 1 N O O Memory Link O O O Possible combination Impossible combination Combinations other than those indicated above cannot be set Reference When using serial port B for communication with the host and serial port A for the transmission of screen data from the Support Tool set the settings of serial port A to None 149 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or seri al port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 150 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Display the fourth memory switch screen by pressing the J next screen or f previous screen touch switch Press the touch switch corresponding to the port at which the host link method is to be set Comm A Method or Comm B Method to display the setting option Host Link The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed Press the Set touch switch to the right of the port at which the setting has been made Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 Press the Comm Speed touch switch to dis play the communications speed to
6. CQM1 CPU41 EV1 CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1 CPU45 EV1 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 CQM1H CPUS1 4 CQM1H CPU61 4 CQM1H CV series 5 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CVM1 series 5 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 CVM1 CompoBus S master control unit SRM1 C02 V1 1 One of the following communication boards is required C200HW COM02 COM04 COM05 COM0E EV1 2 ACPM1 CIF01 adapter is required 3 Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable CPM1 CIF0O1 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect 4 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required 5 CPUs of CVM1 CV series PCs without the suffix EV cannot be connected Reference CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT link method Use the 1 N connection NT link method standard or high speed instead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 69 or Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 73 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Settings at the Host The setting methods for each unit are as follows Connecting to a C series C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H or SRM1 PC PC Setup Area Settings Write the PC Setup area data memory se
7. Terminator setting DIP SW6 Set this switch to ON Set terminator ON C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1H or SRM1 The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used as shown in the following table PC model Connection method C200HX HG HE Z E e Connect to the RS 422A port port A on a Communications Board CQM1H e Connect to the RS 422A port port 2 on a Serial Commu nications Board CPM1 e Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter CPM2A SRM1 e Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter CPM2C e Connect to the peripheral port on a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 Connecting Cable through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter The CPM2C CN111 splits the Units Communication Port into a RS 232C port and a peripheral port e There are no Communication Boards for the C200HX HG HE Z E in which port B is the RS 422A port e There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is the RS 422A port PC Setup Area Settings When connecting to a C200HX HG HE Z E or CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1H CPUs or SRM1 set the following communication conditions for the PC Setup area 103 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Item Setting at Host I O port RS 422A Communication mode Host link mode Communications speed Set the same speed as for the NT631 NT631C 1 Stop bit 2 stop bits
8. 0 0 0 000005 170 6 9 11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function 00 172 6 9 12 Setting the Time out Interval 0 000 0 174 6 9 13 Setting the Retry Count 0 0 0 0 eee eee 176 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function 000 177 6 11 System Maintenance 0 ee eee ee 181 6 1 1 VO Settings 2 00 se cee e et eae E eed te ete 181 6 11 2 Displaying Setting the Calendar and Clock 185 6 11 3 Checking the PT Setting Status 00 187 6 11 4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record 188 6 11 5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record 190 6 11 6 Checking Screen Data 0 0 eee eee eee 192 6211 7 Device Check sersa eae aah bt hahaa ae chet eh 195 6 11 8 Checking Interfaces u n 00 0 eee eee 205 6 12 Programming Console Function 0 0 0 0 e eee eee eee eee 211 6 12 1 Usable Systems 3 gic cas a ee hee ae hea ee es is 212 6 12 2 Connection Method 0 0 eee eee 213 6 12 3 Method of Use oi ce bie ed ea peers Soa eee pee 214 6 13 Device Monitor Function 0 0 0 eee eee eee 217 6 13 1 Compatible Systems 0 cee eee eee 218 6 13 2 Connection Method 00 eee eee 218 621353 Method of Use siryen sinn aae E EA TEAS ER SES 219 6 14 Version Display 2 734 swash a iaeh
9. Press Quit e Pressing Abort on the communication condition confirmation method setting screen causes the NT631 NT631C to return to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 without executing setting with the previous settings still effective On completion of communication condition confirmation method setting the NT631 NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect Section 6 11 System Maintenance 6 11 System Maintenance The NT631 NT631C has the following maintenance and check functions Function I O Settings Adjustment of display panel contrast and brightness of the backlight Page 181 Calendar Check Display and setting of the time data of the NT631 NT631C clock function Page 185 PT Settinas Direct connection setting of the screen data in the NT631 NT631C and display of 9 the setting statuses of the serial ports Page 187 Displ
10. Example Parity error at serial port A Receive Errors The following errors can occur when receiving data e Parity error e Framing error e Overrun error e FCS sum value error e Time out error e Data over flow error e PC unit No error Host Link only e NAK received in the case of the Host Link the end code is also displayed e Undefined command error Send Errors The following errors can occur when receiving data e Time out error e Data over flow error Probable Causes and Remedies The remedies to take in accordance with the displayed cause are indicated in the table below Error Details Displayed Probable Cause Parity Error Framing Error Over run Error Communication parameters conditions set incorrectly Check if the settings at the host for parity bit frame length communications speed stop bit length and flow control agree with those at the NT631 NT631C Check the communication cable connection and perform a conductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable For details on communication cables refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port The connecting cables are not connected correctly Noise caused data corruption during communication Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 FCS Check Sum Error 230 Noise c
11. Section 5 1 C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU85 ZE 5 9 Z E have a 5 V output no external power supply is required for the NT ALO01 5 1 4 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS 232C When making an RS 232C connecting cable as far as possible use the recom mended parts indicated in the table below Some units come supplied with one connector and connector hood Check the required parts and prepare them in advance Connector XM2A 0901 Remarks 9 pin type Made by OMRON Delivered with CS1 series CS1G H C series CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPUs CV500 LK201 XM2A 2501 25 pin type Made by OMRON C500 LK203 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C200H LK201 V1 DB 25P 25 pin type Made by JAE 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 Connector hood 92 XM2S 0911 9 pin type Made by OMRON C series CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPUs CV500 LK201 XM2S 0913 Made by OMRON 9 pin XM2S 0911 E Made by OMRON 9 pin CS1 series CS1G CS1H XM2S 2511 25 pin type Made by OMRON C500 LK203 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C200H LK201 V1 DB C2 J9 25 pin type Made by JAE 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 AWG28 5P Multi core shielded cable IFVV SB Made by Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB_ Multi core shielded cable 5P 28AWG M
12. Occurrence When you have finished checking the screen press the central part of the screen to return to the screen number selection screen If you wish to continue by checking another screen repeat the operation start ing by specifying the screen number To end the operation press Quit on the screen number selection screen The NT631 NT631C returns to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen The NT631 NT631C provides checks on the functions of the following items e Buzzer e LED e LCD e Backlight e Screen data memory e Touch switches e Battery voltage Page 195 Page 196 Page 198 Page 199 Page 199 Page 202 Page 204 Check if the buzzer sounds correctly 195 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Reference The buzzer will sound in this check regardless of the setting made with the Buzz Checking the RUN LED 196 er Sound memory switch Check the buzzer by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode iE ue LiL Select I O Check Select Device Check Select Buzzer Check e If the buzzer functions correctly it will sound continuously At this time the Buzzer Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video e To stop the buzzer while it is sounding press the Buzzer Check touch switch again Check if the RUN LED functions normally System Maintenance Section 6 14 Check th
13. Decrease 10 steps Press Quit The contrast is set and the NT631 NT631C returns to the previous screen The NT631C ST141 EV allows the brightness of the backlight to be ad justed in 3 steps The BRIGHTNESS ADJUST screen enables you to make the adjustment while actually checking the brightness on the screen In the NT631C ST151 screen is displayed EV adjustment is not possible even though this 183 System Maintenance Section 611 Adjust the backlight brightness by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 A Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Settings Select Brightness Adjust Adjust the contrast with the High Middle and Low touch switches in the left half of the screen Press Quit The contrast is set and the NT631 NT631C returns to the I O SETTINGS MENU screen 184 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen func tion or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area EE T Adjust the brightness with the touch switches Friman jp arn High Middle Low in the left half of the screen Tey a Press Quit Pein _ 6 11 2 Displaying Setting the Calendar and Clock The NT631 NT631C has a clock fu
14. E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HX Z E CS1G CPU42 E CS1G CPU43 E CS1G CPU44 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS1 series CS1G CS1H CPU63 E CS1H CPU64 E CS1H CPU65 E CS1H CPU66 E CS1H CPU67 E V V V V CS1G CPU45 E V V V V V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS1 series CS1H CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 Either of the communication boards C20Q0OHW COM02 COM04 COM05 COMO06 EV1 is required 274 Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin CVM1 CV series CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 Model List CPU Units for Connection via a 1 1 NT Link CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 10CD CPM1A 20CD CPM1A 30CD CPM1A 40CD Specification RS 232C adapter connected to the peripheral port RS 422A adapter cannot be used Appendix J C series CPM1 CPM2A 30CD CPM2A 40CD CPM2A 60CD Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CPM2A CPM2C 10 CPM2C 20 Connect to the RS 232C port of a CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable C series CPM2C CQM1 CPU41 EV1 CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1 CPU4
15. Message character string table No 13 set for bit memory table No 24 Recorded data Character string table No 11 Bit memory table No 24 Image library data 005F 97 12 04 11 19 20 Character string table No 12 Bit memory table No 23 Image library data 102A 97 12 04 11 25 12 Image library Character string table No 13 data 102B Image library data 102B Character string table No 13 Character string table No 12 When the upper message displayed is pressed the image library data 102B set for bit memory table No 13 is displayed You can set several words of numeric data at the PT in tabular format and write it to the host You can also read several words of numeric data from the host and display it on the PT screen System Configuration Section 1 3 1 3 System Configuration This section shows the configuration of a system that uses an NT631 NT631C For details on product models refer to Appendix J Model List page 273 1 3 1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected Bar code reader Bar codes can be read as character strings Printer For printing out the currently displayed NT631 NT631C screen Memory unit Can store screen data and system program to be read out automatically at startup RS 232C cable The following peripheral devices can be connected to an NT631 NT631C Host Controls the NT631 NT631C as required while controlling mac
16. e The power to the NT631 NT631C is interrupted or the NT631 NT631C is reset e The power to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is interrupted or the computer is reset e The cable connecting the NT631 NT631C to the personal computer on which the Support Tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire e The Quit touch switch on the NT631 NT631C screen is pressed to end screen data transmission e Screen data transmission is stopped by operation at the Support Tool Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 Note When transferring the data in units of screens if there are changes in memory table and or direct access transfer such data along with the screen data 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches The NT631 NT631C can be connected to the host by the following 7 types of communication methods can be used to communicate with a host e Host link e Memory link method e NT Link 1 1 e Mitsubishi A computer link method e NT Link 1 N e Mitsubishi FX method e High speed NT Link 1 N The NT631 NT631C has the following two ports either of which can be used for communications with the host depending on the requirements e Serial port A exclusively for RS 232C 9 pin connector e Serial port B RS 232C RS 422A selectable 25 pin connector The method for setting the communication method for communications with the
17. 1 1 C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU42 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU64 E C200HE CPU42 ZE Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 C200HG CPU33 ZE C200HG CPU43 ZE C200HG CPU53 ZE C200HG CPU63 ZE C200HX CPU34 ZE C200HX CPU44 ZE C200HX CPU54 ZE C200HX CPU64 ZE C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 SRM1 C02 V2 Usable Cables with Attached Connectors e For host link and 1 1 NT Link only 5 V power wire attached J45007 102 9 pin to 9 pin 0 7 m SJ45007 202 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m e For host link 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link 5 V power supplied from PC XW2Z 070T 1 9 pin to 9 pin 0 7 m XW2Z 200T 1 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m SJ46006 102 9 pin to 9 pin 1 m SSJ46006 202 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m CVM1 CV series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix EVL can not be connected by any connection method NT ALO01 side PC side connector RS 232C RS 232C connec tor Shielding wire 9 pin type 9 pin type 5 9 When there is no 5 V output at the PC side When using host link or NT Link 1 1 When there is 5 V output at the PC side eee When using NT Link 1 N e When using the host link or NT Link 1 1 method short the RS and CS termi nals at the PC side with each other leave the RS and CS terminals at the NT AL0
18. 59 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 60 Setting the Front Switches oo0o0000 I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C m System setting DIP SW4 To effect the existing DIP switch settings set SW4 to ON To effect the existing PC Setup set SW4 to OFF Note For CPUs manufactured before or during June 1995 lot No 65 the existing DIP switch settings differ from the existing PC Setup as follows DIP switch settings 2 400 bps 1 stop bit even parity 7 bit data length PC Setup 9 600 bps 2 stop bits even parity 7 bit data length For CPUs manufactured from July 1995 onward lot No 75 the stipulated values in the DIP switch settings also are 9 600 bps and 2 stop bits 1 0 port selector switch RS 232C RS 422A C series C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CPM1H CPUs SRM1 The connection method depends upon the model of PC being used as shown in the following table PC model Connection method C200HS CQM1 Connect to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port C200HX HG HE Z E e Connect to the CPU Unit s built in RS 232C port e Connect to one of the RS 232C ports port A or port B ona Serial Communications Board CQM1H e Connect to the CPU Units built in RS 232C port e Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable e Connect to the RS 232C port
19. 6 9 6 Setting the Print Method NT631C Only The NT631 NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631 NT631C When using the NT631C the currently displayed screen image or other data can be printed out in color You can select whether screen data is actually printed out in color or in monochrome tones that represent colors with this memory switch setting When PCL 5 is set for Printer Controller the setting is fixed as Tone e Color Color images are printed in color e Tone Color images are printed in monochrome tones The default factory setting is Tone Reference In addition to this setting NT631C has the Printer Controller setting page 162 e For details on the print function refer to 2 15 7 Print Function in the Reference Manual Set the print method setting by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press Print Method to display the required printing method The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 N
20. Ammonia gas Carbonic acid gas Phenol Glycerin Ammonia water Calcium chloride Developing fluid hypo Acetaldehyde Lard For information on chemical agents not listed in the table above please inquire whether or not protection is offered if the chemical agent is one against which silicone rubber is recognized as offering protection please use this product even if the agent is not listed in the Protects against column of the table above Does not protect against Hexane Lubricating oil Benzene Butane Carbonic acid Chlorinated solvents Napthalene Soy bean oil Toluene Replacement Battery 3G2A9 BAT08 This is a lithium battery used for memory backup 280 Appendix K Option List Appendix K Memory Unit NT MF261 This is a dedicated unit for reading writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT631 NT631C Data is transmitted by DIP switch setting at the memory unit 281 Numbers 1 N connection among RS 422A ports 116 1 N connection among RS 485 ports 118 1 N connection between RS 422A 485 at the NT631 NT631C and RS 232C at the host 88 A Allowable power supply voltage range 241 Applicable connectors 277 Automatic transmission memory unit 39 47 Backlight for NT631C only 232 Backlight brightness adjustment 183 Battery cover 28 Before operating 21 C Cable connection dimensions 251 Cable for peripheral port of CS1 series PLC 278 Cables with c
21. Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Connector XM2A 0901 Remarks 9 pin Made by OMRON Section 4 1 Delivered with CS1 series CS1G CS1H C series CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPUs CV500 LK201 XM24 2501 25 pin Made by OMRON C500 LK203 CV500 LK201 C200H LK201 EV1 DB 25P 25 pin Made by JAE 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 XM2S 0911 9 pin Made by OMRON C series CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series CPUs CV500 LK201 Connector XM2S 0913 9 pin Made by OMRON hood XM2S 0911 E 9 pin Made by OMRON CS1 series CS1G CS1H XM2S 2511 25 pin Made by OMRON C500 LK203 CV500 LK201 C200H LK201 EV1 DB C2 J9 25 pin Made by JAE 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 AWG28 5P IFVV SB Multi core shielded cable Made by Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB 5P 28AWG Multi core shielded cable Made by Hitachi Cable Ltd Note After connecting a communication cable always secure it with the screws OMRON Cables with Connectors When a connection is made at serial port A in other than the memory link meth od OMRON cables with connectors shown below are available Model Cable Length 2m Connector Specification XW2Z 200S XWe2Z 500S XW2Z 200T XW2Z 500T When a connection is made to a personal computer at serial port A in the memory link method OMRON cable with connectors shown below are avail
22. EPE Example Print out All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently dis played screen Example Sort by occurrence from oldest record No Scrn YY MM DD HH MM Comment 1 98 01 12 10 21 Coolant Error 2 98 01 12 11 53 Motor Error 1 2 3 8 98 01 13 09 35 Compressor Error 4 2000 98 01 13 14 22 Emergency Stop 6 11 5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record 190 The alarm history record function is a function that continually monitors during operation the status of bits at the host designated in advance with a bit memory table and records the time when these bits come ON and the number of times they come ON The record data can be displayed and printed out at a printer connected to the NT631 NT631C by operation from the System Menu This section explains how to display and print out the alarm history record data recorded in the NT631 NT631C Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence ON time order and sort by frequency order of number of times the bits have come ON System Maintenance Section 6 14 Reference With the NT631 NT631C the record data can also be displayed by registering an alarm history display element on the screen e For details on the alarm history record function refer to 3 8 Using the Alarm List History Function of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Reference Manual V064 e The order of display for sort by occurrence displa
23. Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HE Z E C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU53 Z Z C200HG CPU33 C200HG CPU63 E EC E EC E Z Z Z Z 2 2 Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HG Z E 275 Model List Appendix J Specification PC Type C200HX CPU34 Z E 2 Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HX CPU44 selectable 9 pin C200HX Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E 2 C200HX CPU64 C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CS1G CPU42 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS1 series CS1G CPU43 E CS1G CS1G CPU44 E CS1G CPU45 E V V V V CS1H CPU63 E V V V V Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS1 series CS1H CPU64 E CS1H CS1H CPU65 E CS1H CPU66 E CS1H CPU67 E V1 1 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required 2 Either of the communication boards C20O0OHW COM02 COM04 COM05 COM06 EV1 is required 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CPU Units for Connection via a High speed NT Link 1 N Specification CS1G CPU42 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS1 series CS1G CPU43 E CS1G CS1G CPU44 E CS1G CPU45 E CS1H CPU63 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CS1 series CS1H CPU64 E CS1H CS1H CPU65 E CS1H CPU66 E CS1H CPU67 E Reference Serial Communications Boards CS1W
24. Parity Even Data length ASCII 7 bits Unit 00 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Setting the Host Link Method page 148 Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device e g CX Programmer For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area refer to the manual for the PC which is used The PC Setup area word numbers and settings to be made depending on the unit to which the connection is made are shown below When using port A of the communication board of C200HX HG HE Z E Writing Value Settings Host link mode no CTS control Communication conditions set by the contents of DM Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 9600 bps Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps Unit 00 When using a CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 Writing Value Settings Host link mode no CTS control Communication conditions set by the contents of DM Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 9600 bps Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps Unit 00 When using a CQM1H Writing Value Settings Host link mode no CTS control Communication conditions set by the contents of DM Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communicatio
25. and sort by frequency order of number of times displayed 188 System Maintenance Section 611 Reference With the NT631 NT631C the record data can also be displayed by calling screen No 9001 sort by occurrence or screen No 9002 sort by frequency during the RUN mode e For details on the display history record function refer to 2 15 1 Display Histo ry Record Function in the Reference Manual e The order of display for sort by occurrence display from oldest record or from newest record is set with the Hist Disp Method memory switch page 168 The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the Printer Controller page 162 and Print Method page 164 memory switches Display and print the display history record data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Display History nina Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Fre nat quency 189 System Maintenance Section 6 11 If necessary select the next or previous screen by pressing J next screen or T previous screen The example screen to the left shows a dis play for the sort by occurrence method from oldest record If required press Prt to print the display his tory record data Press Quit The NT631 NT631C returns to the DISPLAY HISTORY MENU screen EE
26. host is described here For details on setting the communication conditions for a bar code reader refer to 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function page 177 Reference Apart from the host it is also possible to connect the Support Tool or a bar code reader to serial port A When a bar code reader is connected at serial port A the host must be connected at serial port B When serial port A is being used for communications with the host the host must be disconnected so that the Support Tool can be connected There are four memory switch setting screens The conditions for communica tions with the host are set on the fourth screen the screen on which 4 4 is dis played For details on setting memory switches other than those for setting the conditions for communications with the host refer to 6 9 Various System Set tings page 158 When using the Mitsubishi A computer link method and Mitsubishi FX method a system program for multi venders is required Install the system program to the NT631 631C by the system installer refer to page 140 For details refer to PC Connection Manual V042 E1 L When using PLCs manufactured by Allen Bradley GE Fanuc or Siemens refer to NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual V060 E1 L 6 7 1 About Communication Conditions Items Set for The following settings are made for the communication conditions for commu Communication nication between the NT63
27. insert the touch panel cable fully Then lock the connector Locked Unlocked Not locked completely ee 5 Loosen mounting screws and remove backlights Shift the backlight to the right and pull it out When loosening or tightening screws for backlights be sure to use a mag 235 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Section 7 3 netized Phillips screwdriver If any screw falls inside the unit it must be extri cated without fail Adadddad UE r oL L k S N 6 Fit new backlights The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom Fit projections and dents of the backlight with those on the fixture and shift the backlight to the left Check that the backlight is in contact with the left end of the fixture and the cable comes out from the notch without being trapped When the backlight is correctly fit tighten the screws at a torque of 0 1 Nem E Cle ed I OSES Mounting screw lt a Se 7 SAA Nep Top part Bottom part 7 Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in place The backlight cable has a polarity refer to the figure below o cL 8 Fit two touch panel cables at the top Be sure to lock the connectors as in step 4 after fitting 9 Close the rear case and tighten four screws Make sure that the internal cable is not trapped 10 Reconnect the wiring cables and uni
28. method standard or high speed can be used 84 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connecting an NT631 NT631C and NT AL001 RS 422A NT631 NT631C NT ALOO1 Host RS 422A RDA NT631 NT631C side NT AL001 side Short circuit TRM Abbreviation tool RS 422A SDA 1 485 terminal SDB block Era Shielding wire A 24V lt T DC In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not make the connection between the functional ground of the NT AL001 and the shielding Connecting an NT631 NT631C and NT AL001 RS 485 NT631 NT631C Host NT AL001 RDA NT631 NT631C side NT AL001 side RS 422A terminal RS 422A SDA 1 485 terminal SDB block I 24v lt T DC In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not make the connection between the functional ground of the NT AL001 and the shielding Reference When using RS 485 as a port for the NT631 NT631C only NT Link 1 N method standard or high speed can be used Connecting an NT AL001 and Host NT631 NT631C Host NT ALOO1 RS 232C Wiring When Connecting a Host Link Unit 25 pin Applicable units C200H LK201 V1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C500 LK203 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 CV500 LK201 communication port 1 85 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 86 Cables with connectors that can be used
29. page 160 Buzzer Sound page 161 Printer Controller page 162 EXPANSION MODE MENU Quit Version Display page 219 MAINTENANCE Recipe Table page 136 Print Method page 164 MODE MENU Memory Table page 137 Screen Saver Movement page 165 Memory Switch page 138 t Screen Saver Start up Time page 166 Quit Hist Disp Method page 168 Memory Init Resume Function page 170 Memory Switch Comm Auto return page 172 I O Settings Time out Interval page 174 Calendar Check page 185 PT Settings page 187 Display History Alarm History Screen Data Disp page 192 Retry Counts page 176 L Comm A Method page 147 L Comm B Select page 157 L Comm B Method page 147 Programming Console Function page 211 Device Monitor Function page 217 Comm Port B page 207 1 0 Check VO SETTINGS MENU I O CHECK MENU L Quit Contrast Adjust page 181 Quit L Brightness Adjust page 183 I F Check L Device Check DISPLAY HISTORY MENU I F CHECK MENU gt Quit t Sort by Occurrence page 188 t Quit L Sort by Frequency page 188 Tool Comm page 205 Comm Port A page 207 ALARM HISTORY MENU Printer page 210 Quit Sort by Occurrence page 190 Sort by Frequency page 190 D
30. port 1 on a Serial Commu nications Board CPM1 Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter CPM2A SRM1 e Connect to the CPU Units built in RS 232C port e Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter Connect to the CPU Unit s RS 232C port or the peripheral port through a Connecting Cable CPM2C CN111 CS1W CN118 or CS1W CN114 The CPM2C CN111 splits the Units Communication Port into a RS 232C port and a peripheral port A CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter is also required to connect to this peripheral port PC Setup Area Settings When connecting to a C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 or CQM1H CPU or SRM1 set the following communication conditions for the PC Setup area Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Item Setting at Host Communication mode Host link mode Communications speed Set the same speed as set at the NT631 NT631CC1 Stop bit 2 stop bits Parity Even Data length ASCII 7 bits Unit 00 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Settings the Host Link Method page150 Set the PC Setup area settings directly from a Programming Device e g CX Programmer For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area refer to the manual for the PC which is used The PC Setup area word numbe
31. 000 connected PT 0 7 When connecting PTs with model numbers 0 2 3 4 and 5 to the built in RS 232C port for example set the value 8200 Hex to word 160 000A Hex to word 161 and 0005 Hex to word 166 Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device Programming Con sole or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device CX Program mer to the CPU For details on PC Setup refer to the SYSMAC CS1 series Operation Manual W339 E1 When using the CX Programmer to set the high speed 1 N NT Link set the com munications baud rate to 115 200 bps Setting The Front Switches Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631 NT631C is connected to O RUN O ERR ALM O INH OOPRPHL COMM omrRon SYSMAC CS1G PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPUs DIP switches inside the battery storage e Set SW4 to ON establishing communication in ac cordance with PC Setup when connecting the NT631 NT631C to the peripheral port e Set SW5 to OFF establishing communication in ac MCPWR E E BUSY A OPEN connection of RS 232C devices RS 232 port This is used mainly for connection of RS 232C L UC cordance with PC Setup when connecting the NT631 NT631C to the RS 232C port PERIPHERAL devices This also supports connection of the CX Programmer 74 Connecting to a CS1 Ser
32. 2 This connection method is used with the RS 485 type NT Link 1 N method standard or high speed PT Host RS 485 cable L max total length 500 m Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host PC and there must be no branching Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays and communication failures O x x PC __ At termination PC PC Relay terminal block Relay terminal block Max 2 NT631C NT631 NT631 NT631 NT631 NT631C NT631 NT631 NT631C NT631 Not at Not at At termination termination Not at termination termination Example of Good Connection Examples of Bad Connections Reference CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT Link method Use the 1 N connection NT Link method standard or high speed instead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 108 or Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 110 5 2 1 Host Types and Settings The types of host that have an RS 422A port and can be connected to the RS 422A 485 port of the NT631 NT631C and the settings to be made at the host are described here When Using the Host Link Method Compatible Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS 422A 485 type host link function built in With the CS1 series and
33. 2 1 Operation at Startup The NT631 NT631C operates as follows when the power is switched ON or when it is reset Initial Processing Self diagnosis including a check on the internal memory of the NT631 NT631C and a system program check and the internal processing re quired for startup are performed If an error occurs during initial processing an error screen is displayed If there is an error in the system program the system program must be re installed For details on the installation procedure refer to 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode page 140 Memory Unit Check and Check if a memory unit is installed If a memory unit is installed processing Processing screen data and system program reading writing is executed in accordance with its DIP switch settings pages 36 44 If there is an error in the screen data an error screen is displayed Pressing the OK touch switch on the error screen will return the display to that immediately before the error occurred It is also possible to display the System Menu from the error screen by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneous ly If there is an error in the system program the main menu of the system install er mode is displayed If this is the case reinstall the proper system program Initialize the memory or change the settings as required Start of Communication Communication with the host starts in accordance with the communicati
34. 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Display the fourth memory switch screen by pressing the J next screen or 1 previous screen touch switch Press the Comm B Select touch switch to display the communication type to be set The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed Reference If serial port B is used for RS 485 communications RS 422A must be set as its communication type To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or f previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 157 Various System Settings Section 6 9 6 8 Starting Operation Note Switching to the RUN Mode and Starting Operation Confirming the Communications between the NT631 NT631C and the Host After completing screen data transmission and setting the communication conditions connect the NT631 NT631C to the host and start operation Check the operation of all screen data and host programs carefully before usi
35. 485 Port Some of the elements arranged on a normal screen are not displayed The quantity of read data exceeds the stipulated restriction The total of the element coefficients for the displayed screen is greater than 1024 Check the maximum number of elements by referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the Reference Manual creating the screen data again and transmitting all of the screen data in a batch to the NT631 NT631C On an overlapping screen some of the set elements are not displayed Since the data is transmitted from the host in screen units the number of elements on the overlapping screen has exceeded the maximum permissible without being checked by the Support Tool Check the maximum number of elements by referring to Display Restrictions in Appendix A of the Reference Manual creating the screen data again and then sending all the screen data in a batch to the NT631 NT631C The System Menu cannot be called up Display System Menu under Change System Settings in the System Installer mode is set to Disabled In the System Installer mode set Display System Menu to Enabled page 143 The following System Menu operations are not possible Establishing the Transmit mode Displaying the memory switch setting screens Screen data memory check Displaying the initialization menu Displaying the calendar time setting screen Screen Memory Protect under Change System Set
36. 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC CS1G CS1H The 1 N NT Link standard or high speed can be used The connection method is exactly the same as for the 1 N NT Link Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC 6 13 3 Method of Use The Device Monitor screen is displayed by operating the system menu as de scribed below Ver 3 10 Select Expansion Mode Select Device Monitor An error message will be displayed ot if the wrong communications proto patan Version col is selected Oram ing 4 DEVICE POR TOR HEM The Device Monitor screen is displayed Reference When an error screen is displayed press the Check touch switch on the screen to return to the system menu In addition pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously in the error screen enables the display of the system menu For more details on operations of the Device Monitor function refer to 2 16 De vice Monitor Function in the Reference Manual 6 14 Version Display Use the Version Display function to check the version of the NT631 NT631C s system program The Version Display screen shows the model creation date and version of the system program installed in the NT631 NT631C 219 Version Display Section 6 14 6 14 1 Method o
37. 8 bits Stop bits length 1 bit 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None XON XOFF 5 2 2 Direct Connection between RS 422A Ports at Both Units The connection method in which the RS 422A ports of an NT631 NT631C and a host are connected is described here NT631 NT631C Serial port B RS 422A 485 terminal block Host link CPU Communication unit SYSMAC CS1 series PLC C series PLC CVM1 CV series PLC SRM1 9 pin connector or 25 pin connector RS 422A cable with connectors max length 500 m Connecting an NT631 NT631C and Host RS 422A NT631 NT631C 112 Host RS 422A l Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 RDA 24V DC Wiring When Connecting a C series Host Link Unit or CPM1 Host Link Applicable units NT631 NT631C side C200H LK202 V1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C500 LK203 3G2A6 LK202 EV1 PLC side er Abbreviation FG RDB terminal round RS 422A O 9 pin type In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 422A cable Wiring When Connecting CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C or SRM1 Applicable units
38. 9 pin type mm pitch screw made by OMRON XM2S 0913 9 pin type inch pitch screw made by OMRON DB C2 J9 25 pin type made by JAE 277 Model List Appendix J Printer Cable Model Specification NT CNT121 Printer cable for half pitch 1 5 m made by OMRON Cable for Peripheral Port of CS1 series PC Mods SSCS SCSCSCSCSS fication SSCSC C Y CS1W CN118 Made by OMRON CS1 series peripheral port lt gt D sub 9 pin female Connecting Cable for the CPM2C Communications Connector Modi Specification CPM2C CN111 Made by OMRON CPM2C communications port lt D sub 9 pin female C series peripheral port 278 Appendix K Option List Replaceable Backlights NT631C CFLO1 for NT631C ST151 _ EV2 These are backlights for NT631C for replacement purposes Two pieces make a set Replaceable Backlights NT631C CFLO2 for NT631C ST141 _ EV2 Protective Sheet NT610C KBA04 Stuck to the display to prevent irregular reflection or contamination The entire sheet is colorless and transparent The five sheets make a set 279 Option List Chemical resistant Cover NT625 KBA01 Covers the front panel and protects it from various chemical agents The entire sheet is milky white and made of silicone rubber The sheet offers protection against the following chemical agents Protects against Boric acid Sulfuric acid Nitrogen
39. CPM2C ll ll ll RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin female RS 232C port Peripheral port iz D Sub 9 pin female Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 or CQM1H When using a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 or CQM1H the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC Setup area data memory effective C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 CQM1H oH ot Be a H a 1 h v Oe o E a RS 232C port communication condition setting Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PC Setup effective Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 When using the CQM1H s built in peripheral port turn ON SW7 Setting the Switches of a CPM2A When using a CPM2A the switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective Set the Communications switch to OFF down position OFF GE On Setting the Switches of a CPM2C When using a CPM2C the switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the peripheral port and RS 232C port e Connecting PT to peripheral port e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A device that requires non standard communications settings
40. CPU01 EV1 C1000H C2000H CPU01 EV1 C2000H C1000H CPU01 EV1 C1000H C2000H CPU01 EV1 C2000H Connectable to CS1 series CS1W SCB41 E 3G2A6 LK202 EV1 C200HX C200HX ZE 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 C500 LK203 CPM1 10 20 30CDR CPM1 CIF11 CPM1A 10 20 30 40CDL CPM1 CIF 11 CPM2A 30 40 60CDLIL1 CPM1 CIF11 CPM2A Peripheral port connection CPM2C 10 20 oO CPM2C CQM1H SCB41 CQM1H CPU51 61 CQM1H CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CV series 2 CV500 LK201 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CV500 LK201 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 SRM1 SRM1 C02 V1 CPM1 CIF 11 SRM1 CPM1 CVM1 series 2 1 Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect 2 CPUs of CVM1 CV series PCs without the suffix EVL cannot be connected The host link method cannot be used when an NT631 NT631C is connected us ing RS 485 To use the host link method connect by RS 422A Settings at the Host When using the RS 422A type host link method the settings shown below must be made at the host depending on the unit some of these settings may not be necessary or settings not shown here may be neces
41. CPU34 Z E 2 C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E 2 C200HX C200HX CPU64 Z E 2 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE 2 C200HX CPU85 ZE 2 CQM1H CPU51 61 3 1 The serial CS1W SCB41 E communication board is required 2 A C200HW COM03 V1 or C200 COM06 V1 communication board is required 3 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required Settings at the Host C series C200HX HG HE Z E PC Setup Area Settings Write the communication conditions directly into the PC Setup area data memory using a Programming Device e g CX Programmer Make the setting indicated in the word shown below 108 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 a ae a Port A of a C200HX DMes55 Use NT Link 1 N HG HE Z E highest unit number of the Reference Port 2 ofa CQM1H 2 DM6550 connected PTs 1 to 7 1 The Communications Board s RS 422A 485 port 2 The Serial Communications Board s RS 422A 485 port 3 When using C200HE Z E the maximum PT unit number is 3 For details on setting the PC Setup area settings refer to the PC s operation manual e There are no Serial Communication Boards for the C200HX HG HE Z E in which port B is the RS 422A 485 port e There are no Serial Communication Boards for the CQM1H in which port 1 is the RS 422A 485 port Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communication Board Set the switches on a C200H
42. Cables with Connectors for PT gt PC NT AL001 E Cable Length Applicable units Communication Method Specification XW2Z 200S Host link units with a 25 pin Serial port A host link i f XW2Z 5005 connector RS 232C only 9 pin lt gt 25 pin XW2Z 200T Host link units with a 9 pin Serial port A host link NT link XW2Z 500T connector 1 1 RS 232C only 9 pin lt 9 pin XW2Z S002 Personal computer with a 9 pin Serial port A for using NT connector Support Tool 1 The following PCs can supply 5 V C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H CPM2A CPM2C and CS1G H Cables with Connectors Model Cable Length Specification 2m CV500 CN228 25 pin male lt gt 9 pin male XW2Z S002 2m 9 pin female 9 pin male 9 pin 9 pin Connection Cable Model Specification AWG28 5P IFVV SB Multicore cable manufactured by Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB 5P 28AWG Multicore cable manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd Applicable Connectors Specification Connector XM2A 2501 25 pin type male made by OMRON XM2D 2501 25 pin type female made by OMRON for personal computers XM2A 0901 9 pin type male made by OMRON XM2D 0901 9 pin type female made by OMRON for personal computers DB 25P 25 pin type male made by JAE Connector hood XM2S 2511 25 pin type mm pitch screw made by OMRON XM2S 2513 25 pin type inch pitch screw made by OMRON XM2S 0911 9 pin type mm pitch screw made by OMRON XM2S 0911 E
43. Check the communication settings of the host to be used Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Display the fourth memory switch screen by pressing the J next screen or 7 previous screen touch switch 4 Piai tit kuia Press the touch switch corresponding to the port at which the memory link method is to be set Comm A Method or Comm B Method to display the setting option Memory Link The setting option changes each time the None set touch switch is pressed m In this example serial port A is used rt kare tjt buj Press the Set touch switch to the right of the __ port at which the setting has been made sary Li f In this example serial port A is used 155 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 156 EE baij Display the data bits to be set 7 bits or 8 bits 4 ri by pressing the Data Bit Length touch switch Display the stop bits to be set 1 bit or 2 bits by pressing the Stop Bit Length touch switch Display the parity to be set None even odd by pressing the Parity Bit touch switch Display the communication speed to be set 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps by pressing the Comm Speed touch switch Display the condition of the flow control to be set None RS CS XON XOFF by pressing Flow Control touch switch If the RS 422A is selected for serial port B setting RS
44. Communication Type for Serial Port B 157 6 8 Starting Operation 0 eee eens 158 6 9 Various System Settings 0 0 0 ee eee eee ee 158 6 9 1 Memory Switch Setting Screens 0 00 00 0000005 159 6 9 2 Setting the Start up Wait Time 00 00 0000 0000 159 6 9 3 Setting the Key Press Sound 00 0 0 0 eee ee eee 160 6 9 4 Setting the Buzzer Sound 0 00 00 eee eee eee 161 6 9 5 Setting the Printer Controller 00 0 0000 162 6 9 6 Setting the Print Method NT631C Only 00 164 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 e 165 6 9 8 Setting the Screen Saver Start up Time 0 0 166 6 9 9 Setting the History Display Method 00 168 6 9 10 Setting the Resume Function 0 2 0 00 0 00005 170 6 9 11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function 00 172 6 9 12 Setting the Time out Interval 0 000 174 6 9 13 Setting the Retry Count 0 00 00 0 eee eee 176 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function 00 0 177 123 Section 6 6 11 System Maintenance 00 2 ec cece eee 181 6211 1 V O Setting So poise gon Riel ileal ging ERER ete Bandieelea bles 181 6 11 2 _ Displaying Setting the Calendar and Clock 185 6 11 3 Checking the PT Sett
45. Devices Multiple Windows e NT631 NT631C can store a system program into a memory unit This enables the system to handle more flexible setups Screen data can be checked simply by operations at the NT631 NT631C system menu without connecting up to the Support Tool The number of elements that can be registered on one screen has been consid erably increased making it possible to create more expressive screens For de tails refer to Display Restrictions in Appendix A Specifications of the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual It is now possible to write binary data stored in words at the host directly to the NT631 NT631C This makes data conversion by a program at the host unneces sary reducing the load on the host Any quadrupled characters are displayed with a 32 dot high definition font By using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool Type NT ZJCAT1 EV4 the system program at the NT631 NT631C can be changed easi ly from a personal computer The NT631 NT631C meets UL CSA standards and EC directives Compatible with Sequencers in the following series Mitsubishi A series Calcu lator Link and FX series Programming Console Allen Bradley SLC 500 Se ries GE Fanuc 90 20 and 90 30 Series and Siemens S7 300 and S7 400 Se ries Specialized system programs can be installed that allow the NT631 NT631C to be controlled from other companies Sequencers Up to 3 windows can be displaye
46. Direct decessiE 2 08 Street Ieas or lire A steer Carers Vamos Unit Data Birk J fuetem Cragren T3310 ORI C rect Fecesst 7 2 p Rak 1 Sh ping Ceeration Sereni Bowie PT Screen Hemery hit Lax Current PT Screen Data System The first line Compatible PT type for the system program inside PT The second line System program name and Version for the system program inside PT The second line may not be displayed in the kind of system program Current PT Screen Data Screen The comment for the screen data in the NT631 NT631C is displayed here Current Memory Unit Screen Data e In the case of system program The first line Compatible PT type for the system program inside the memory unit The second line System program name and Version for the system pro gram inside the memory unit The second line may not be displayed in the system program for some models e In the case of screen data The comment for the screen data in the NT631 NT631C is displayed here The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings of the origin of transmitting as described in the table below Source Destination PT screen Memory unit Bank 0 gt Memory unit Bank 1 q PT system PT system screen Memory unit Bank 0 1 fixed Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 Source Destination Memory unit Bank 0 e If system program is selected PT system fixe
47. Functions The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table below SW1 Switch Function Automatic transmission writing from the memory Not executed unit to the PT Executed Automatic transmission writing from the PT to the Not executed memory unit Executed Manual transmission Direction of transmission and Not executed bank used selected at the PT touch panel Executed Screen data Data type to transfer System pro gram Switch Function Disable Enable Disable Enable Bank 0 Bank 1 Disable Enable Disable enable writing to PT Disable enable writing to the memory unit Area bank selection of automatic transmission System Screen simultaneous transmission The memory unit stores system program or screen data for one PT in each of areas bank 0 bank 1 The total data storage is for two PTs SW2 3 sets which of these two banks is used for automatic transmission Reference The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented to NT631 NT631C With V 38 Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 Reference The DIP switch function of the memory unit is supplemented in the NT631 N6T31C PTs with the VL suffix e In the following cases a mode setting error occurs e More than one of the SW1 1 to SW1 3 switches are set to ON e None of the SW1 1 to SW1 3 swi
48. Host NT ALO01 RS232C RS 485 total length 500 m max 2 m Direct 1 1 connection PT RS 485 max 500 m HH 1 N connection PT RS 485 total length 500 m Connection possible Connection not possible e The RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT AL001 requires 5 V 150 mA at pin 6 of the RS 232C connector Check the signals of the RS 232C connector at the host e 5 V is not output from serial port B of the NT631 NT631C When connecting an NT ALO01 at serial port B a separate power supply is required for the NT ALO01 e The cable of an NT AL001 cannot be connected or disconnected while the power is ON Always connect or disconnect the cable while the power supply from the RS 232C cable is OFF while the host power supply is OFF e NT Link 1 N connection is possible even when RS 232C is used at the NT631 NT631C side for communication with the host but in this case one NT ALO01 unit is required for each NT631 NT631C In this case it is convenient to use serial port A of the NT631 NT631C 5 V is not output from serial port B 26 Names and Functions of Parts Section 2 2 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts Before starting operation the names and functions of the parts of the NT631 NT631C are described here as a confirmation A method of hardware settings is also described Front View POWER LED Lit in green when the p
49. Memory Switch Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the third memory switch setting screen Press Time out Interval to display the re quired time lapse The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed according to the fol lowing sequence 01 02 03 09 10 00 01 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 175 Various System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 13 Setting the Retry Count The NT631 NT631C does not immediately display an error screen when a com munication error occurs but tries to re establish communication The Retry Counts setting specifies the number of attempts to be made to re establish com munication If communication cannot be recovered within this number of at tempts the following happens depending on the setting made for the Comm Auto return memory switch page 172 Comm Auto return ON Operation in the RUN mode is continued
50. N For an NT Link 1 1 RS 232C Type Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A B Number of units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 15m When using an NT AL001 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable Max 2m e RS 422A cable Total length 500 m max 245 Specifications Appendix A For an NT Link 1 1 RS 422A Type Specification Communications standard EIA RS 422A Connector Terminal block serial port B Number of units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 500 m For an NT Link 1 N RS 232C Type Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A B Number of units connected 1 1 to 8 Transmission distance Max 15 m To connect two or more PTs NT ALO01 units are required When using an NT ALO01 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable Max 2m e RS 422A 485 cable Total length 500 m max For an NT Link 1 N RS 422A 485 Type Specification Communications standard EIA RS 422A 485 Connector Terminal block Number of units connected 1 1 to8 Transmission distance Max 500 m For a High speed NT Link 1 N RS 232C Type Item Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A B Number of units connected 1 1 to 8 Transmissi
51. N OFF Terminator ON T OFF 98 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 C1000H C2000H rack mounting type 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Setting the Front Switches Mode selector Host Local Mode selector key switch Set this to Host link Setting the Rear Switches I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A I O port RS 422A RS 232C a Unit DIP SW1 Syrichronization Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 External Synchronization selector switch Terminator Set this to Internal OFF ON Communications speed CTS DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 easel Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON Terminator setting selector switch Set this switch to ON 99 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 C1000H C2000H rack mounting type C500 LK203 Setting the Rear Switches 5V supply ON OFF I O port RS 422A RS 232C Synchronization Internal External Terminator OFF ON CTS ov External ANOR AON h BEBBRERE I O port selection selector switc
52. NT Link 1 1 Connect to the PC s communications connector with a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Con necting Cable a CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter or a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC When using the Programming Console function with a CPM2C turn ON pin 2 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPM2C s CPU Unit The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link 1 N standard or high speed Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC The standard or high speed 1 N NT Link can be used The Programming Console function can be used only when the PT s unit num ber is set to 0 Only one unit using the Programming Console function can be connected to each of the PC s ports built in RS 232C port and peripheral port With the CS1G CS1H the Programming Console function can be used simulta neously at both the built in RS 232C port and peripheral port Furthermore the Programming Console function can be started at the RS 232C port while a Pro gramming Console is connected to the peripheral port 213 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 6 12 3 Method of Use The Programming Console screen is displayed by operating the system menu as descr
53. NT600S NT610G NT610C NT620S NT620C NT625C After being read to the Support Tool screens must be modified in accordance with the screen size Depending on the function used partial modification of pro grams may also be necessary For details on the compatibility of screen data refer to the N7T31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual and the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual e The dimensions of the panel cut out to accommodate the NT631 NT631C are the same as for the NT625C Two Ports Featured as Standard Port A for Common Use by Support Tool Host and Port B for Exclusive Use by the Host e Communication with the host is possible via another port while connected to the Support Tool e Reading bar code data from a bar code reader is possible via another port while communicating with the host Rapid System Program amp Screen Data Changes Possible Using a Memory Unit e Installing a memory unit type NT MF261 on the rear of the NT631 NT631C makes it easy to write screen data into the NT631 NT631C on site This en ables a rapid response to setup changes Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 Screen Data Check Function Large Increase in Maximum Number of Registered Elements Binary Data can be Read to Written from the Host Character Display Using High Definition Fonts Simple Version Upgrades Complies with International Standards Compatible with Other Vendors
54. NT631C continuously switch the NT631 NT631C power back ON Reading and Writing Data In this method the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used by Manual Transmission are set by touch switch operations at the NT631 NT631C Transmission can be executed while checking the settings Reference When data is written to the NT631 NT631C or memory unit the data that has been stored up until that point is lost Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission 1 2 3 1 Check that the NT631 NT631C power is OFF then set the DIP switches on the memory unit as follows SW2 Setting of SW2 4 not relevant Setting of SW2 3 not relevant Setting of SW1 4 not relevant In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors it is advisable to set SW2 1 and SW2 2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data is to be read 2 Switch the NT631 NT631C power ON 41 Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 42 Display language select screen appears Memory Unit J Rn BeBHL CCA Se ect language AGE mad Japanese English 3 Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display lan guage The following descriptions are for when English is selected The screen shown below is displayed enor Unit Heruil Teunem t gt Turcent PT Jute Sle Suslen Progen NRZI ORIN
55. Operating lt 4 c se isaha ni Ka LARS Re RR Oe RAG OAT eS SECTION 2 Preparing for Connection cee ee ee eeeee 2 1 Method for Connection to the Host 0 0 cece eee eee eee 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 20 cece cee eee eee SECTION 3 Hardware Settings and Connections 006 3 b Installation 0 3 4 nnd deta eh ew eee tata A e phage ated 3 1 1 Installation Environment 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 3 1 2 Installation in the Operation Panel 0000 3 1 3 Power Supply Connection 0 00 00 eee ee eee eee 3 1 4 Groun dN Sy eostas iA KEES Bi Bek ae Aime NER NS ML sea a ees 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool 0 00 eee eee eee 3 3 Connecting a Printers esna da She eka a i ae es 3 3 1 Connection Method 0 cece eee eee 3 4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader 0 0 eee eee 3 4 1 Connection Method 0 0 cee eee eee eee 3 4 2 Setting a Bar Code Reader 0 0 0 0 00002 eee eee 3 4 3 Data Format e sss otia 64606 te Sb Es Se oes Sela 3 5 Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 3 5 1 Installation Method 0 0 ee eee 3 5 2 Method 6f USE ei y once cde gives esc i p eeii ei barb eck irek 3 6 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the Vj Suffix 3 6 1 Installation Method 00 cece ee ee eee 3 6 2 Method of Use occ oes G
56. Press Hist Disp Method to display the re quired display order The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 10 Setting the Resume Function The NT631 NT631C has a function to keep the contents of the memory tables even when the power to the NT631 NT631C is OFF and write back them to the host when the power is turned ON 170 Section 6 9 Various System Settings Reference If the resume function is OFF the memory tables are initialized to these initial values on switching to the RUN mode If the resume function is ON these are not initialized and are kept the battery backed up contents When the memory table is initialized its contents are reset to the initial state that is set by the Support Tool When the system is started up the next time the screen is displayed using the previous contents of the memory table e ON The resume functio
57. SCB41 and Serial Communications Units CS1W SCU21 with lot number 991220 12 20 99 and later support the high speed 1 N NT Link Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used to establish a high speed 1 N NT Link RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit Model o Spei Cd NT ALOO1 RS 232C 9 pin connector m orean OO RS 232C Adaptor RS 422A Adaptor O mo O o Speo O O CPM1 CIF01 Links the RS 232C port of an NT631 NT631C and the peripheral port of a CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C or SRM1 compatible with host link and NT Link 1 1 CPM1 CIF11 Links the RS 422A port of an NT631 NT631C and the peripheral port of a CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C SRM1 compatible with host link 276 Model List Appendix J Related Parts and Equipment for PT Remark Support Tool Compatible with PC AT personal computers NT ZJCAT1 EV4 For Windows 95 98 NT English version CD ROM Options NT631C CFLO1 Replaceable backlight for NT631C ST151LJ EV1 NT631C CFLO02 Replaceable backlight for NT631C ST141LJ EV1 NT610C KBA04 Reflection suppressing protective sheet for NT631 NT631C NT625 KBA01 Chemical resistant cover for NT631 NT631C NT MF261 Memory unit for NT631 NT631C 3G2A9 BAT08 Spare battery The Support Tool indicated above includes the system installer and the standard system programs Ver 3 0 for the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C System programs for the earlier NT30 620 PTs are also included
58. Saw bank owe bee Rew eta Bake 222 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 00 000 cece eee eee 225 7 2 1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies 225 7 2 2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies 227 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission 228 7 2 4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies 229 7 2 5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies 229 7 3 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C 2 eee 231 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery 00 cece eee ee s 237 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning 0 cee cece cece 238 221 Troubleshooting 7 1 NT631 NT631C Symptoms Power LED fails to come ON Troubleshooting Section 7 1 When a fault relating to the operation of the NT631 NT631C occurs find the symptoms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Reme dy indicated in the table Note 1 Confirm system safety before turning the power ON OFF or resetting 2 Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification Power is not being supplied Check the connections and make sure that power is supplied correctly 3 1 3 Power Supply Connection page 31 Power supply fuse has blown Contact your OMRON service center Nothing is displayed on the screen Screen No 0 has been read at the host side This is not an error Change the screen number
59. Sounding for 0 2 seconds Setting Set ON for Key Press Sound in the memory switch menu 243 Specifications Appendix A Item Specifications Memory switch setting Self test functions such as for the memory and external interface Setting condition confirmation function Maintenance function Communication check function Initialization of internal memory data Display of display alarm history data Registered data test display function Backup of numeral character string memory table data in the NT631 NT631C Backup of display alarm history data Backup of calendar and clock setting Battery backup Battery life 5 years at 25 C When voltage becomes low RUN LED lights in orange or red The communication flag to the PC BAT LOW comes ON 1 Retains the contents of the numeral character string memory tables i e they are not initialized when the power is turned ON when the NT631 NT631C is reset and when the operation mode is changed Setting Set ON for Resume Function in the memory switch menu Resume function Functions Prints a hard copy of the screen display Prints display alarm histories Setting Set the printing protocol Print Controller and printing type Print Method in the memory switch menu ESC P Color Color printing conforming to ESC P 24 J83C PC PR201H Color Color printing conforming to PC PR201PL Scr
60. Specification 20 to 75 C Vibration resistance Conforms to JIS C0911 60 minutes in each of X Y and Z directions Shock resistance Conforms to JIS C0912 47m s2 3 times in each of X Y and Z directions Communications Specifications RS 232C Interface Communications speed Specification Max 64k bps Transmission distance Max 2m Connector RS 422A 485 Interface Communications speed 9 pin D SUB connector female Specification Max 64k bps depends on the RS 232C communications speed Transmission distance Max 500 m Connector 8 terminal detachable terminal block M3 0 255 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit Appendix C DIP Switch Settings The convertor unit has 6 digits DIP switch for setting the RS 422A 485 communication conditions Before connecting the cable to the convertor unit make the DIP switch settings fl QOL Factory settings ON 123456 SW1 1 Not used always ON SW1 2 Setting for built in terminal resistance OFF Terminator not set ON Terminator set SW1 3 4 Selection of 2 wire type 4 wire type SW1 3 SW1 4 OFF on le e 2 wire type RS 485 SW1 3 SW1 4 OFF e i ON 4 wire type RS 422A SW1 5 6 Selection of the RS 422A send mode SW1 5 SW1 6 OFF ON Conti
61. The following table shows the combinations of communications methods and PCs that can support the PT s Device Monitor function Communications method 1 1 NT Link C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 C200HE CPU42 C200HG CPU33 C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPUS53 C200HG CPU63 C200HX CPU34 C200HX CPU44 C200HX CPU54 C200HX CPU64 C200HX CPU65 Z C200HX CPU85 Z PC model CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 10CD CPM1A 20CD CPM1A 30CD CPM1A 40CD CPM2A 30CD CPM2A 40CD CPM2A 60CD CPM2C 10 CPM2C 20 CQM1 CPU4 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 SRM1 C02 V2 EV1 1 N NT Link C200HE CPU32 C200HE CPU42 C200HG CPU33 C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU63 C200HX CPU34 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 SRM1 C02 V2 CS1G CPU42 E CS1G CPU43 E CS1G CPU44 E CS1G CPU45 E C200HX CPU44 C200HX CPUS4 C200HX CPU64 C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CS1H CPU63 E CS1H CPU64 E CS1H CPU65 E CS1H CPU66 E CS1H CPU67 E 1 A CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter is required 2 Use a Conversion Cable CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect to the PC 6 13 2 Connection Method CQM1H or C200HX HG HE Z E Z Z
62. Vj Suffix Section 3 6 Reference 1 2 3 Writing Screen Data to the PT Using Automatic Transmission Memory Unit to PT Reference 1 2 3 When screen data is written to the memory unit the data that has been stored in the specified area up until that point is lost there is no effect on the other area Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT631 NT631C to the memory unit by automatic transmission 1 Check that the power supply to the NT631 NT631C is OFF then set the DIP switches of the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in NT631 NT631C 23 4 L234 lnl lall Dg g Dg OFF OFF Swi Sw2 SW2 3 ON Bank 1 OFF Bank 0 It is not strictly necessary to set SW 2 1 to OFF to disable writing to the memory unit but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors 2 Switch the NT631 NT631C power ON The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit The screen data in the NT631 NT631C is preserved The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing When messages Preparing Transmitting and Verifying are displayed the RUN LED flashes and when the message Finished is displayed the RUN LED lights 3 Switch the NT631 NT63
63. XW2Z 200S 9 pin 25 pin 2 m XW2Z 500S 9 pin 25 pin 5 m CVM1 CV series host link unit CV500 LK201 has two types of connector a 25 pin connector communication port 1 and a 9 pin connector communica tion port 2 When using the communication port refer to Wiring for Connections other than Memory Link page 86 RS 232C connect tor NT AL001 side PC host link unit side 9 pin type RS 232C connector 25 pin type ooooo0oo000000 OOOOO0OO0OO0OO0OO0OO0OO0Q 13 Wiring for Connections Other Than Memory Link Applicable units CV500 LK201 communication port 2 CS1W SCU21 CPM1 10CDR CPM1A 10CDL1 CPM1A 30CDL1 CPM2A 30CDLIL CPM2A 60CDLIL CPM2C 10 CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1H CPU11 CQM1H CPUS51 CS1G CPU42 E V1 CS1G CPU44 E V1 CS1H CPU63 E V1 CS1H CPU65 E V1 CS1H CPU67 E V1 C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HE CPU32 E C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HE CPU32 ZE CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 20CDL1 CPM1A 40CDL 25 CPM2A 40CDLIL1 CPM2C 20 CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU61 CS1G CPU43 E CS1G CPU45 E CS1H CPU64 E CS1H CPU66 E V V V V aS eNO 1 1
64. able 5m 9 pin amp 25 pin 2m 5m 9 pin 9 pin Model CV500 CN228 XW2Z S002 The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Cable Length 2m Connector Specification 9 pin 25 pin 2m 9 pin 9 pin Note Wiring for a Host Link Unit 25 pin Connection Applicable units C200H LK201 EV1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 77 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Wiring for Other Connections 78 C500 LK203 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 CV500 LK201 communication port 1 Cables with connectors that can be used at serial port A XW2Z 200S 9 pin 25 pin 2 m XW2Z 500S 9 pin 25 pin 5 m CVM1 CV series host link units CV500 LK201 have two types of connector a 25 pin connector communication port 1 and a 9 pin connector communica tion port 2 When using communication port 2 refer to Wiring for Other Connec tions Other Than the Memory Link Method page78 Serial Port A B NT631 NT631C PC host link unit numbe Connector RS 232C interface SEE a Gein e 25 pin type interface ooo0oo0oo0o00000 ooooo0oo0oo00000 13 25 For units that have a CTS setting selector switch RS and CS do not have to be shorted if this switch is set to OV Applicable units CV500 LK201 communication port 2
65. be set The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed In this example serial port A is used Press Quit The communications speed is set e To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the commu nications speed press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 and the previous communications speed remains in effect On completion of communications speed setting the NT631 NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 151 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 3 Setting the NT Link 1 1 Method Set the communication conditions for the NT Link 1 1 method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select
66. buzzer sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Biain a Press Buzzer Sound to display ON OFF arne a 2 ey or ERROR ON The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 5 Setting the Printer Controller The NT631 NT631C has a function for printing out data at a printer connected to it in response to an instruction from the host or operation at the NT631 NT631C Three types of printer can be connected to the NT631 NT631C select the type used with this memory switch setting e ESC P Printers that conform to Epson s ESC P 24 J83C color printer control specifications or printers that conform to Epson s ESC P 24 J82 mono chrome control specifications 162 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Reference e PC PR201
67. calculations to numeral memory tables or words in the host The new device monitor function can be used to change the PC s operating mode or display change values in the PC s memory areas The present values PVs of several words can be listed with the device monitor Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 Interlock Function Improved Lamp Touch Switch Labels NT30 NT30C and NT620S NT620C NT625C Emulation Additional CS1 Data Areas Accessible Recipe Function Adjusting Contrast and Brightness During PT Operation PT operations and inputs can be disabled from the PC if interlock bits have been allocated in the PC for the corresponding PT touch switches numeric inputs or string inputs The following displays can be performed with lamp or touch switch labels e Display several lines of labels e Switch the display between different labels when OFF and ON e Display the numeral memory table contents as labels e Display the string memory table contents as labels The word configuration of the PT status control area and PT status notify area can be set to emulate those of the NT30 NT30C or NT620S NT620C NT625C this mode is called NT30 620 compatible mode When the PT is operating in NT30 620 compatible mode it will be equivalent to an NT30 NT30C or NT620S NT620C NT625C in the functions listed below The PT retains full V2 functionality in all functions other than the ones listed below Refer to Appendix C in
68. center Unable to erase System Program Hardware fault or flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life If the same message is displayed on repeating selection of Download System Program and attempting to delete the system program several times contact your OMRON service center 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program page 140 Unable to download System Program Acommunication error occurred during downloading of the system program Illegal data has been written into the screen data memory Hardware fault or flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life Select Download System Program and download the system program again 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program page 140 Also refer to 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission page 228 and take the corrective action described for tool transmission errors If this does not solve the problem contact your OMRON service center Unable to write System Settings Hardware fault or flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life If the same message is displayed on repeating writing of system settings several times contact your OMRON service center If writing is normally terminated after the error message was once displayed the Memory Switch setting for system program may have been altered In such a case check and re
69. data inside the memory unit 3 6 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the VL Suffix 44 Reference This section discusses the use of a memory unit with the basic versions of the NT631 NT631C PTs NT631 ST211LJ E NT631C ST141L E and NT631C ST151 L E In this case the function and use of the memory unit are the same as ones for the NT631 NT631C without VL The system program transmission by using a memory unit cannot be processed By installing a memory unit NT MF261 on the NT631 NT631C the screen data in the NT631 NT631C can be recorded backed up in the memory unit In addition the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the NT631 NT631C when it starts up This means that screen data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Support Tool The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other means In systems where there are frequent setup changes by preparing a number of memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with the control performed in each case the NT631 NT631C screen data can be changed simply by changing the memory unit without connecting to the Support Tool One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs Using a Memory Unit Versions without the Vj Suffix Section 3 6 Note 1 Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF befo
70. earlier NT30 620 PTs is also included with the NT ZJCAT1 EV4 These system programs have mutual compatibility therefore they can be installed and used for the NT631 ST211 E NT631C ST1410 E NT631C ST151 0 NT631 ST211 EV1 NT631C ST141 EV1 NT631C ST151 EV1 NT631 ST211 EV2 NT631C ST141LJ EV2 NT631C ST151 J EV2 each However there will be a limitation on function depending on the combination Refer to the following tables Limitations of System Program PT Combinations The following table shows only the relationship between the hardware and system program For details of the relationship with the screen data created using the Support Tool refer to NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 Operation Manual V061 E1 L 269 Relationship between system program and hardware Combining a V1 Version and Version without a V System program Ver 1 0 Appendix Suffix Hardware NT631 ST211 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 The following functions can not be used e Analogue meter e High definition font display e Installation of system programs using memory unit e Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs e Memory link Window control from the host Multiple display of window screens Moving a window Refe
71. for either the screen number set in the PT status control area or the Initial Screen set with the Support Tool Or the screen number which does not exist are registered Either specify a screen number for which data is registered at the PT status control area or set the screen as the Initial Screen in the System settings under PT Configuration at the Support Tool Touch Panel is disconnected The touch panel cable film cable inside the NT631 NT631C is disconnected If this message appears after the backlight is replaced reinstall the touch panel properly referring to Replacing the Backlight page 232 If the message keeps appearing contact your OMRON service center Memory Switch Corrupted Because Memory Switch setting was last Initialized Memory Switch setting Press Confirm to return to the SYSTEM MENU The memory switches have been initialized due to discovery of an error in the memory switch settings Set the memory switches again using the System Menu and the System settings under PT Configuration at the Support Tool Section 6 System Menu Operation If the problem recurs contact your OMRON service center Calendar Data Error Calendar Data is incorrect Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and set Calendar Data There is an error in the date time values due for example to low battery voltage Check the battery voltage by checking the color of the RUN LED and with the battery check in t
72. is a method to send and receive data between a personal computer or a FA computer and the NT631 NT631C by using RS 232C 422A communica tion In memory link there is an area called PT Memory as shown below inside the NT631 NT631C and this area is treated as a virtual area on the PC This allows PT memory and the display elements of the NT631 NT631C to make a quasi di rect connection By sending a command for the memory link the host can make the NT631 NT631C execute processes through PT memory Frequently used commands are kept handy for read and write tasks of the numeral memory table character string memory table and bit memory table PT memory Numeral Direct connection RS 232C 422A communication In the memory link method the only difference is that the NT631 NT631C finds its communication target inside instead of outside In the memory link method therefore change of the target is all that is needed to be capable of using the exact screen data that is acquired by the direct connection With the NT631 NT631C the Support Tool must be used to convert the data to screen data for the memory link When compared to the direct connection of the host link or NT link methods the memory link method has some restrictions regarding the use of some functions as described below e The Programming Console and Device Monitor functions cannot be used e The following strobes of PT status notify bits does not
73. of the following ways depending on the type of RS 232C connector 25 pin Connector SD RD RS SD RD Personal computer CS S i 7 Connector for peripheral devices on PT 2 3 4 5 cs 9 SG FG 1 Shielding wire CPP N oO A O N Connector hood SG 5 V od 6 Connector hood Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable XM2D 2501 Connector Remarks 25 pin made by OMRON for personal computer side XM2A 0901 9 pin made by OMRON for PT side Connector hood XM2S 2511 25 pin made by OMRON for personal computer side XM2S 0911 9 pin made by OMRON for PT side Cable AWG28 5P IFVV SB Multi core shielded cable made by Fujikura Ltd CA MA VV SB 5P 28AWG 9 pin Connector Multi core shielded cable made by Hitachi Cable Ltd R O44 N 2 O sp sp Q48 S O RD 7 4 Personal computer RS O O Connector for peripheral devices on PT o 5S O 5 9 se O a Y O ISG Shielding wire 5y Connector hood 6 oak Connector hood Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable Connector XM2D 0901 Remarks 9 pin made by OMRON for personal computer XM2A 0901 9 pin made by OMRON for PT Connector hood XM2S 0911 9 pin mm pitch screw made by OMRON XM2S 0913 9 pin inch pitch screw made by O
74. panel cable fully Then lock the connector Locked Unlocked Not locked completely F go 5 Loosen two mounting screws and remove the backlight When loosening or tightening screws for backlights be sure to use a mag netized Phillips screwdriver If any screw falls inside the unit it must be extri cated without fail 6 Fit new backlights The backlight for the top is different from that for the bottom Each backlight has three projections Slot these projections into slits on the unit and tighten the screws while lightly holding the backlight by fingers Make sure that the cable does not come out of the backlight If it comes out 233 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Section 7 3 234 put it in the backlight and then tighten the screws The tightening torque must be 0 2 Nem 7 Engage backlight connectors at the top and the bottom respectively in 10 12 place The backlight cable has a polarity refer to the figure below Fit the touch panel cable Be sure to lock the connector as in step 4 after fitting Close the rear case and tighten four screws Make sure that the internal cable is not trapped Reconnect the wiring cables and units disconnected in 2 and tighten the screws at a torque of 0 4 Nem Turn the power on and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no buzzer is sounding If the RUN LED flashes at 1 sec intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently the touch pa
75. po setting connector D SUB 9 pin connector female EIA RS 422A 485 Serial port B connector selectable by memory switch setting Terminal block Serial port B terminal block Parallel interface Conforms to Centronics standard 20 pin half pitch connector Expansion interface Dedicated connector Serial port B is used for either a connector or terminal block Note Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 250 mA before using the 5 V output of pin No 6 The 5 V output of the unit delivers 5 V 5 and 250 mA maximum Programming Environment Item Specification Programming System Programming support software Programming support software P ing Tool base ce tooth NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 0 made by OMRON Special Features Item Specifications Three kinds of buzzer sound continuous short intermittent and long intermittent ON On reception of a command from the host display of a screen with a buzzer setting or display of an error screen such as for a receive error OFF On reception of a command from the host or display of a screen with no buzzer setting Setting Set ON for Buzzer Sound in the memory switch menu or set ERROR ON for the buzzer to sound only when an error occurs The buzzer sounds three times in response to prohibited input Buzzer Touch switches Touch switch input sound Input sound
76. previous settings still in effect Unit numbers are numbers assigned to each PT when multiple PTs are con nected to one host so that the host can identify the individual PTs The units num bers that can be set differ according to the host model as follows e C200HE ZE Unit numbers 0 to 3 maximum of 4 PTs per host port e C200HG ZE C200HX ZE Unit numbers 0 to 7 maximum of 8 PTs per host port When making the settings make sure there is no duplication of unit numbers among PTs On completion of unit number setting the NT631 NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 5 Setting the Memory Link Method Set the communication conditions for the host link method at serial port A or seri al port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below
77. printer NT CNT121 made by OMRON cable length 1 5 m 20 pin 36 pin Refer to the following when making a cable for connection to a printer e Connector pin arrangement and wiring Connector for a printer Printer on PT side i 11 1 on a ot 267 Appendix Relationship between system program and hardware Here relationship between system program and hardware is described NT631 NT631C have following models NT631 ST211L Conventional product NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 NT631 ST211L Version upgrade model of the products above NT631C ST141L 12 98 NT631C ST151 NT631 ST2110 Version upgrade model of the products above NT631C ST1410 12 99 NT631C ST151 System programs indicated below are installed for the models shown above in the default state Also system pro grams are supplied with the Support Tool as follows e System programs for NT631 ST211L1 E NT631C ST141 E NT631C ST151 E System Program Ver 1 0 System programs supplied with NT ZJ3AT1 EV2 ZJCAT1 EV2 e System programs for NT631 ST211 EV1 NT631 ST141 EV1 NT631 ST1510 EV1 System Program Ver 2 0L or 2 1 System programs supplied with NT ZJ3AT1 EV3 ZJCAT1 EV3 e System programs for NT631 ST211L EV2 NT631C ST141 EV2 NT631C ST151 EV2 System Program Ver 3 0 System programs supplied with NT ZJCAT1 EV4 A system program for the
78. problem persists contact your OMRON service center No Screen Data No Screen Data is saved in Screen Memory Download Screen Data using by the Support Tool Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT MODE and download Screen Data again No screen data is registered Transmit screen data from the Support Tool No Direct Connection Info No Direct Connection Information is set in Screen Data Set Direct Connecting Information in Screen Data using by the Support Tool Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT MODE and download Screen Data again Allocated words have not been set for the PT status control area and PT status notify area Allocate words for the PT status control area and PT status notify area with the Support Tool and then transmit the direct connection information to the NT631 NT631C 225 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Message Incorrect Screen Data Screen Data in Screen Memory do not match with the System Program Initialize Screen Memory and download Screen Data again The type of registered screen data does not match that at the NT631 NT631C Section 7 2 Initialize the screen data memory then transmit the correct screen data 6 4 1 Clearing Screen Data page 131 No Starting Screen Specified Starting Screen is not saved Fix Screen Data using by the Support Tool Then set the PT to the TRANSMIT MODE and download Screen Data again No data is registered
79. selected the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the memory switches On completion of memory switch initialization the message Finished is dis played and the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen After initialization the memory switch statuses are as follows Start up Wait Time 00 Key Press Sound ON Buzzer Sound OFF Printer Controller ESC P Print Method Tone NT631C only Screen Saver Movement Display erased Screen Saver Start up Time 010 139 Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 Memory Switch Status Hist Disp Method From New Data Resume Function OFF Comm Auto return OFF Time out Interval 01 Retry Counts 005 Comm A Method Host Link communications speed 9600 bps Comm B Select RS 232C Comm B Method None The communication conditions for a bar code reader are initialized as follows Data bits 7 bits stop bit 1 bit parity none flow control RS CS 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode e Setting the display language see below e Clearing installing the system program page 140 e Disabling enabling display of the System Menu changing the system settings page 142 e Disabling enabling writing to the screen data memory changing the system settings page 142 e Clearing screen data page 143 For d
80. selected at the PT touch panel Executed Reserved for system use must be set to OFF SW2 Function Disable Enable Disable Enable Bank 0 Bank 1 Disable enable writing to PT Disable enable writing to the memory unit Area bank selection of automatic transmission Reserved for system use must be set to OFF The memory unit stores screen data for one PT in each area bank 0 bank 1 The total data storage is for two PTs SW2 3 sets which of these two banks is used for automatic transmission Reference In the following cases a mode setting error occurs e More than one of the SW1 switches are set to ON e None of the SW1 switches are set to ON e In the following case a protect setting error occurs Writing to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2 1 or SW2 2 e For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors refer to Errors When Using a Memory Unit page 3 to 25 Writing Screen Data to a in this mode the screen data in the NT63T NT631 ts forcibly written to the HEER sag Using _ memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT631 NT631C PT to Memon Uni e This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation is not possible or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the opera tion site is using the system 46 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the
81. speed The PC used does not support the Programming Console function Not all PCs support the Programming Console function Check the model of the PC you are using 6 12 Programming Console Function page 211 A Programming Console is connected It is not possible to use a Programming Console and the Programming Console function at the same time Disconnect the Programming Console Programming Console Error Programming Console Function does not RUN It can be caused by e Connecting cable is faulty e PROGRAMMING CONSOLE is connected to PLC e Protocol mismatch between the PT and PLC Set the PLC to NT Link The connecting cable is defective Check the cable connection and perform a conductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 A Programming Console is connected It is not possible to use a Programming Console and the Programming Console function at the same time Disconnect the Programming Console The communication conditions at the PC have been changed in accordance with the NT631 NT631C Programming Console function Set the communication conditions at the PC to match the conditions set in the System Menu 227 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data In
82. the Cable for Connection to a Printer 0000 267 I Relationship between system program and hardware 04 269 J Model List yaspi eran tach wl ees wae a ee es See a 273 R Option List prr orroe teas hee eaietiad OET E eee bees Re oka Mee ee ee tis 279 Indek 65s be CE AKEN SCADA CREE A ECP EONAR CHAGAS SEED CERNE AO vii PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Ter minal You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a Programmable Terminal 1 Intended A dinte coon tina Se ee Rs OR REE RE leeks LAR a x 2 General Precautions 2 5 ees re hae gh a ER SHE ae ee ee x 3 Safety Pr cautions onse cser anena oR G SAS ele agg Hades codecs Sala eed xX ix Safety Precautions 1 Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of installing and connecting FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities 2 General Precautions N WARNING N WARNING The user must operate the pr
83. the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Termi nal Reference Manual for more details e Word configuration and functions of the PT status control area and PT status notify area e Image library codes e Insertion of image library data into character strings Data areas in CS1 PCs that were previously inaccessible can be accessed The data areas listed below can be accessed read written All banks in the EM area timer completion flags TU counter completion flags CU Work areas WR Task flags TK and the HR area You can set the data numeric values for multiple words in record units using the tabular elements on the PT screen and write these settings in a single operation to words on the host i e PC or PT memory using a touch switch operation on the PT Unit Also multiple words of numeric data can be read from the host in one operation In this way groups of parameter settings can be edited at the PT Unit and written to or read from the host You can display the brightness and contrast adjustment screen using either the touch switch or commands from the host even while the PT is in operation 1 2 4 Comparison between NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT631 NT631C Support Tool used NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C NT ZJCAT1 EV4 or NT ZA3AT EV2 NT ZJCAT1 EV4 DIP switches On rear of unit None software settings Use of memory unit Not possible Possible RS 232C interface Connector 9 pin also used as por
84. the RS 422A 485 cable set this switch to OFF to inactivate the built in terminal resistor 2 wire type 4 wire type selection DIP SW1 3 SW1 4 For RS 422A set both of these switches to OFF 4 wire type For RS 485 set both of these switches to ON 2 wire type Selection of RS 422A 485 send mode DIP SW1 5 SW1 6 For host link or NT Link 1 1 set both of these switches to OFF Always send For NT Link 1 N set SW1 5 to OFF and SW1 6 to ON Sends when CS is H Note Read the manual supplied with the NT AL001 carefully before using the unit 5 1 2 1 1 Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the Host The connection method in which the RS 422A 485 port of an NT631 NT631C and the RS 232C port of a host are connected via a convertor unit is described here An RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT ALO01 is used to convert between the RS 232C and RS 422A communication methods Host link unit CPU NT631 NT631C SYSMAC CS1 series PC C series PC CVM1 CV series PC SRM1 Serial port B RS 232C RS 422A RS 422A 485 convertor unit 9 pin connector or terminal block 25 pin connector NT ALO01 Fl o ge RS 422A 485 cable Desa cable max length 500 m with connectors RS 422A terminal block 9 pin connector Reference When using RS 485 as a port for the NT631 NT631C only NT Link 1 N
85. the following Connecting to a C series Host Link Unit C200H C200HS C200HE HG HX Z E Backplane mounted type C200H LK201 V1 Setting the Front Switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following Unit SW1 SW2 Set these switches to 0 Instruction level parity and transfer code SW4 Set this switch to 2 Communications speed SW3 Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP switch Set 3 to ON CTS selector switch External CTS selection selector switch OV ON Set this always to OV ON 54 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 C1000H F C2000H Backplane mounted type 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Setting the Front Switches Local Host Mode control key switch Set this to host link Setting the Rear Switches I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C I O port T a Unit DIP SW1 RS 422A x RS 232C P EO Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 OD E Synchronization Internal i x External E 1 A Us mee Synchronization selector switch Terminator cH Set this to Internal OFF m ON iD Communications speed x DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 CTS CE i oV Set these switches to 0010 to select External C
86. the setting made for System Setting in the System Installer mode screen data transmission is not possible The screen data comprises the following types of data e User screen data screen units e System memory memory switch settings e Direct connection information Transmitting the Screen Data Section 6 6 Transmitting Screen Data from the Support Tool 1 2 3 e Numeral memory table data e Character string memory table data e Bit memory table data e Mathematical table data e Mark information e Image library data e Recipe table data It is possible to transmit the screen data data for all the screens in file units or to transmit individual data or the data of individual screens in data units It is not possible to transmit table data in data units When data is transmitted in file units all of the screen data in the NT631 NT631C is cleared and then the new data is transmitted When data is transmitted in data units first the previous data is invalidated then the new data is registered as valid data Since the previous data is not cleared free memory area in the NT631 NT631C will be insufficient when transmissions in data units are repeated If this happens write the screen data again by data transmission in file units To transmit screen data from the Support Tool to the NT631 NT631C follow the procedure below Operation 1 Connect the NT631 NT631C to a personal computer in which the Support Tool
87. to call the System Menu are not displayed at corners on the screen If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first the touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed Especially when the touch switch has switch screen function as a result of screen switch over it means the corner is not pressed even if it is kept pressing To successfully call the System Menu first press a corner where no touch switch is displayed and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch switch With the NT631 NT631C the System Menu can be displayed even if the screen has touch switches registered at all four corners Pressing a Touch Switch That Displays The System Menu There is a control key that has the function of displaying the System Menu By registering the touch switch for System Menu display MENU on a screen when creating it the System Menu can be displayed just by pressing this switch If the NT631 NT631C has no system program installed or if the system program is destroyed the System Installer mode is automatically established when the power is switched ON To establish the System Installer mode in order to install a system program or make settings for data management either turn the power ON or reset the NT631 NT631C while pressing the touch switch at the top left corner of the touch panel size 7 2mm 7 2 mm Switch the power to the NT631 NT631C ON while pressing this touch sw
88. to the SYSMAC CS1 series Operation Manual W339 E1 71 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 72 Peripheral port This is used mainly for connection to the Programming Device Setting the Front Switches Set the CPU DIP switch to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631 NT631C is connected to O RUN O ERR ALM O INH OOPRPHL COMM This also supports the RS 232C unit connection RS 232 port This is used mainly for connection to the omron SY SMOG CSIC en CPU42 DIP switches inside the battery storage e Set SW4 to ON establishing communication in accor MOa m EUY dance with PC Setup when connecting the AOPEN O NT631 NT631C to a peripheral port F 2 e Set SW5 to OFF establishing communication in accor LJ dance with PC Setup when connecting the NT631 NT631C to a peripheral port PERIPHERAL RS 232C unit This also supports the CX Programmer Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS 232C port for CS1 series CPU Units CS1W SCB41 21 CPU Allocation DM Area Settings Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communic
89. 01 side open e When using the NT Link 1 N cross connect the RS and CS terminals at the NT ALOO1 and PC sides If there is 5 V output at the PC side no external power supply is required for the NT ALOO1 87 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Wiring for a Memory Link Connection Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the diagram shown below NT ALO01 side Host side Abbreviation Pin number RS 232C aan RS 232C connector connector 9 pin type Shielding wire No 5 V output is at the host side A 5 V output is present at the host side Since it is necessary to input a voltage of 5 V to the number 6 pin of NT AL001 supplying a voltage of 5 V from the host or an external voltage supply for NT ALO01 is required 5 1 3 1 N Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the Host The connection method in which the RS 422A 485 ports of multiple NT631 NT631Cs are connected to the RS 232C port of one host in a 1 N connection is described here An RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT ALO01 is used to convert between the RS 232C and RS 422A 485 communication methods Host link unit CPU ajojofa ja CS1G H G q C200HX HG HE Z E RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT ALO01 Cleo 9 pin connector RS 422A 485 cable max total length 500 m RS 232C cable with NT631 NT631C I connectors RS 42
90. 1 NT631C and the host Conditions Port Communication Method Communication Type Settings Setting Item Function Setting Options Comm A Method Set the communication method used at serial port A system program for OMRON A Depending on the communication method further model Page 150 communication condition settings may be neces None Host Link NT Link 1 1 Page 152 sary NT Link 1 N standard or high Page 152 speed Bar Code Reader Page 155 Memory link 147 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 Comm B Select Set whether serial port B is to be used for RS 232C RS 232C RS 422A or RS 422A communication Page 157 Comm B Method Set the communication method used at serial port A system program for OMRON B Depending on the communication method further model communication condition settings may be neces None Host Link NT Link 1 1 sary NT Link 1 N standard or high speed Memory link Page 150 Page 152 Page 152 Page 155 Communication Condition Settings for The Host Link Method Function Setting Op Page tions Comm Speed Sets the communications speed 9600 bps Page 150 for host link only for communications with the host 19200 bps Communication Condition Settings for The NT Link 1 1 Method No further communication conditions need to be set Communication Conditions Settings for The NT Link 1 N Method Set
91. 134 Initializing display history record data 133 Initializing the memory switches 138 Initializing the memory tables 137 Initializing the recipe tables 136 Inspection method 238 Installation environment 30 Installation in the operation panel 30 L Life expectancy backlight 242 Life expectancy display panel 242 Life expectancy touch panel 243 M Maintenance Mode 128 Making the cable 261 Making the cable for connecting a PC 263 Making the cable for connection to a bar code reader 265 Making the cable for connection to a printer 267 Manual transmission memory unit 41 48 Manuals 21 Memory initialization 131 Memory link method 76 112 Memory switch 147 Memory switch setting screen 159 284 Memory unit 281 Menu tree 128 RUN mode 127 System Installer Mode 127 Mounting dimensions 250 N Noise resistance 241 NT link 17 NT link 1 1 method 65 NT link 1 N method 69 108 high speed 73 high speed 110 NT AL001 253 Number of dots 242 Number of switches touch panel 243 O Operating ambient humidity 241 Operating ambient temperature 241 Operating environment 241 Operating force 243 Operation at startup 126 Operation modes 127 P Peripheral devices that can be connected 15 Power consumption 241 Power input terminals 28 POWER LED 27 Power supply connection 31 precautions ix Precautions to be observed when transmitting scre
92. 141B EV2 STN color display black NT631C ST151 EV2 High intensity STN color display ivory NT631C ST151B EV2 High intensity STN color display black Host Link Units 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 Specification CPU mounted type with RS 232C connector 3G2A6 LK202 EV1 CPU mounted type with RS 422A connector Applicable PC C series C1000H C2000H C200H LK201 V1 Rack mounting unit with RS 232C connector for C200H C200H LK202 V1 Rack mounting unit with RS 422A connector for C200H C series C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Features a selectable RS 232C RS 422A connector C series C1000H C2000H C500 LK203 Rack mounting unit for C500 C series C1000H F C2000H CV500 LK201 Features an RS 232C connector and a selectable RS 232C RS 422A connector Rack mounting unit for CVM1 CV CompoBus S Master Control Unit Model Specification Model Name SRM1 C02 V2 Features an RS 232C port SRM1 Communications Unit Wodel__ Specification Applicable PC RS 232C 2 ports CVM1 CV series CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CS1W SCU21 Rack mounting unit CS1 series CS1G H 273 Model List CPU Units for Connection via a Host Link CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 10CD CPM1A 20CD CPM1A 30CD CPM1A 40CD Specification RS 232C adapter RS 422A adapter connected to the peripheral port Appendix J
93. 1C power OFF remove the memory unit To oper ate NT631 NT631C continuously switch the NT631 NT631C power back ON In this mode screen data is forcibly written from the memory unit to the NT631 NT631C irrespective of the setting status of the NT631 NT631C Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool is used it can save a lot of time When transmitting the same system program or screen data to multiple NT631 NT631C this mode becomes convenient When data is written to the NT631 NT631C the data that has been stored up un til that point is lost Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the NT631 NT631C by automatic transmission 1 Check that the NT631 NT631C power is OFF then set the DIP switches on the memory unit as follows after installing the memory unit in NT631 NT631C L234 1234 a p _ LOFF OFF f Swi swe SW2 3 ON Bank 1 OFF Bank 0 It is not strictly necessary to set SW2 2 to OFF to disable writing to the memory unit but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors 47 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the Vj Suffix Section 3 6 Reading and Writing Data by Manual Transmission 48 Reference 1 2 3 2 Switch the NT631 NT631C power ON The screen data is automatical
94. 232C Combinations of Communication Method and Connection Method The connection methods that can be used depending on the communication method used and the communication type for communication between the NT631 NT631C and the host are indicated in the table below Usable Connection Method Direct 1 1 connection PT Host LI RS 232C max 15 m Usable Communication Method NT NT Link Link 1 1 1 N Host link Memory link Details RS 422A RS 232C 1 1 connection via a convertor unit PT Convertor unit NT AL001 RS 232C max 2 m RS 422A max 500 m 1 N connection via a convertor unit PT F Convertor unit NT AL001 RS 422A total length 500 m RS 232C max 2 m LJ L RS 422A Direct 1 1 connection PT RS 422A max 500 m HI 1 N connection PT RS 422A total length 500 m O Connection possible Connection not possible 25 Method for Connection to the Host Section 2 1 Usable Communication Communica Communica Method tion Type at tion Type at Usable Connection Method NT NT Details PT Host Host Link Link Mem ry link 1 1 1 N 1 1 connection via a convertor unit PT Convertor unit NT AL001 RS 485 RS 232C max 500 m max 2 m 1 N connection via a convertor unit RS 232C PT Convertor unit
95. 232C port D Sub 9 pin female Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 or CQM1H When using a C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 or CQM1H the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC Setup area data memory effective RS 232C port Peripheral port _ D Sub 9 pin female C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1 CQM1H on De es 2 Me Ey Ey in JF FARA cS PEE IN OFF RS 232C port communication condition setting Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PC Setup effective 67 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Setting the Switches of a CPM2A When using a CPM2A the switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective RELE i FERT i ig 2 i E Set the Communications switch to OFF down position oF GEO on Setting the Switches of a CPM2C When using a CPM2C the switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the PC Setup settings effective The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the peripheral port and RS 232C port e Connecting PT to peripheral port e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A device that requires non standard communications settings is connected to the peripher
96. 2A terminal 9 pin connector block Serial port B RS 422A 485 terminal block 88 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connecting an The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay termi NT631 NT631C and nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below NT ALO01 RS 422A NT631 NT631C Host RS 422A NT ALOO1 RDA NT631 NT631C side NT AL001 side Abbreviation I RS 422A terminal a RS 422A SDA 485 terminal SDB block wo Shielding wire Next PT I 24v DC In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not make the connections between the functional ground of the NT ALO01 and the shielding Connecting an The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay termi NT631 NT631C and nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below NT ALO01 RS 485 NT631 NT631C NT AL001 Host RDA NT631 NT631C side NT ALO01 side TRM Abbreviation Pin number Abbreviation RDA RDB RS 422A BSa terminal 1485 block SDA terminal SDB block SDB RSA ERSA Next PT 24V lt J DC In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not make the connections between the functional ground of the NT AL001 and
97. 3 10 i Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Init Select Display History Select Yes initialize Diep ley Histor The display history record data is initialized During initialization the message Initializing is displayed If No is selected the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the display history record data On completion of display history record data initialization the message Finished is displayed and the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 6 4 3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data The alarm history record function continually checks the status of host bits that have been designated in advance with a bit memory table and records the time when any of the bits is set to 1 comes ON and the number of times that each bit comes ON The maximum number of records is 256 for sort by occurrence order of error occurrence and 255 for sort by frequency order of the number of times each error has occurred 134 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Use the alarm history record initialization function to reset the alarm history re cord data to 0 for example when the screen data has been changed etc Also if Screen Use Ring Buffer under History Setting in the PT Environment Settings System Settings has not been checked no more records will be stored after the maximum number of records has been kept and therefore
98. 31C 2 ee eee 1 1 1 Operation of an NT631 NT631C at an FA Production Site 1 1 2 Operations of the NT631 NT631C 0 00000 1 2 Functions of the NT631 NT631C 0 ec eee ee 1 2 1 Feat res 6 prices ere eene En tga tin a a a E a a 4 ite pass ake 448 1 2 2 Comparison between NT631 and NT631C 0 1 2 3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions 0 200 1 2 4 Comparison between NT620S NT620C NT625C and NEO3 TIN TOS IC sscosr ue gS enh Shek tre a singly OERE NEN TA 448 1 2 5 Principal Functions of NT631 NT631C 0000 1 2 6 Displays gcc casnd dssica cde ewes es do its pee Ree RA Aaa a od 1 3 System Configuration i es k eanes R euE EE ER KEA EE AE AE ER RS 1 3 1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected 1 3 2 Connecting to the Host 0 0 c eee eee eee 1 4 Communication with the Host 0 0 0 cee eee eee 1 4 1 Direct Connection Function 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 1 4 2 Host lank see 5 35 n toed 25s Soe aeaseG heat NT IR Ae RR aR Ea 1 4 3 IND Vea ep ete ge ata caie i a a oe 1 4 4 Connecting to Other Companies PCs 00000 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links 0 00000000 1 5 1 Memory Link ss 082s ics Siete She WES ais Se ee as Sa eae 1 5 2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link 1 5 3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function 126 Before
99. 31C PTs are created with the Sup port Tool and transferred to the PT This manual describes how to create and transfer screen data It also describes how to download a system program to a PT using the System Installer The NT series Support Tool for Windows is normally referred to as merely the Support Tool Connecting to Controllers Not Made by OMRON iv e PC Connection Manual V042 E1 L The NT631 and NT631C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following se ries Mitsubishi A Series and FX Series This manual describes the connection and setup methods for these controllers The NT series Support Tool for Windows Version 4 1 is required to connect the NT631 and NT631C PTs to these controllers e NT31 NT631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual V060 E1 L The NT631 and NT631C PTs can be connected to controllers in the following se ries Allen Bradley SLC 500 Series GE Fanuc 90 20 and 90 30 Series and Sie mens S7 300 and S7 400 Series This manual describes the connection and set up methods for these controllers TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS sce fee fob aine hesitate sada ide ences wees 1 Intended Audience y serio ASS OLA RSs A DRA ERS Ok 2 G n ral Precautions i fesse ett Boe RGIS Sees eee Gtad A 3 Safety Precautions s resan ax cies Adsiew aes Mea aaa Adis eae Nea ites SECTION 1 General lt 4 soa viwiet ose otiw eh eee edae s Sew eles Sele 1 1 Role and Operation of the NT631 NT6
100. 485 Communications SECTION 6 System Menu Operation c cece ccc cceceees 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 System Menu Operation Flow 0 0 0 cee eee cece ee Starting the NT631 NT631C 1 eee eee 6 2 1 Operation at Startup 0 eee cee eee Operation Modes and the System Menu 0 000000 0005 6 3 1 Relationships among Modes 0 00 00 ee eee ee eee 6 3 2 Menu Trees tise techies a ee baad spilt ne oak 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu 00000 Memory Initialization 0 0 0 0 eect eee 6 4 1 Clearing Screen Data s g siese sopata e o a ee eee 6 4 2 Initializing Display History Record Data 6 4 3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data 6 4 4 Initializing the Recipe Tables 0000000 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables 000000 6 4 6 Initializing the Memory Switches 0000 Operations in the System Installer Mode 0 0 00 000005 6 5 1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program 0 6 5 3 Changing the System Settings 0 000000 6 5 4 Clearing Screen Data 0 0 0 eee eee Transmitting the Screen Data 0 00 eee cece eee Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches 6 7 1 Abo
101. 5 EV1 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1H C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HS C200HE CPU32 Z C200HE CPU42 Z Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HE Z E C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU33 DE C200HG CPU63 Z Z Z Z Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HG Z E C200HX CPU34 C200HX CPU44 C200HX CPU54 C200HX CPU64 C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE EC E E E E E E E E E Z Z Z Z Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HX Z E CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 Either of the communication boards C20Q0OHW COM02 COM04 COM05 COMO06 EV1 is required Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin CPU Units for Connection via a 1 N NT Link CQM1H CPU51 1 CQM1H CPU61 1 Specification Features a connector for RS 232C connections 9 pin CVM1 CV series CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 PC Type C series CQM1H C200HE CPU32 C200HE CPU42 Z Z E 2
102. 631 NT631C connected to the end of an RS 422A 485 cable Terminal resistance is not applied Open Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT631 NT631C anywhere other than at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices make sure that the power supply to all of the connected devices NT631 NT631C PC etc is OFF 121 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Reference The internal circuit of the NT631 NT631C is shown below AW RDA lt i 3 P Terminal resistor 120 Q Making a connection here inserts a terminator between TRM RDB and RDA RDB e For details on setting the terminal resistance of the host unit refer to Setting methods for each type of the communication 122 SECTION 6 System Menu Operation This section describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start up the NT631 NT631C Functions which are convenient when using the NT631 NT631C and those that are useful for system maintenance are also explained here 6 1 System Menu Operation Flow 0 0 eee eee eee 125 6 2 Starting the NT631 NT631C sarriro ra eenen ee eee 126 6 2 1 Operation at Startup ssc ska eee SS Seek awe ees 126 6 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu 0 00 0 02 eee eee 127 6 3 1 Relationships among Modes 0 0 0 0 0c e eee eee 127 6 3 2 Menu Tree oi ctcecsy
103. 9 11 Setting the Automatic Reset Function The NT631 NT631C has a function for ignoring communication errors and auto matically returning to the RUN mode when they occur The Comm Auto return setting determines whether the automatic reset func tion is effective or not 172 Various System Settings Section 6 9 e ON When a communication error occurs the NT631 NT631C automatically re turns to the RUN mode without displaying an error screen the System Initializ ing screen may be displayed e OFF When a communication error occurs an error screen is displayed and opera tion stops Pressing OK on the error screen returns the NT631 NT631C to the RUN mode The default factory setting is OFF Reference If a communication error occurs when OFF is set for Comm Auto return the NT631 NT631C makes the number of attempts at communication with the host specified by the setting for the Retry Counts touch switch page 176 If communication cannot be re established in any of these attempts an error screen is displayed e For details on communication errors refer to 7 2 5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies page 229 173 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Set the automatic reset function by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press J next screen or T previous screen to display th
104. C power OFF set the memory unit DIP switches correctly then turn the NT631 NT631C power back ON Protect setting error automatic transmission Writing to the data write destination has been prohibited by the setting of SW2 1 or SW2 2 Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF set the memory unit DIP switches correctly then turn the NT631 NT631C power back ON Protect setting error manual Writing to the data write destination has been Perform either of the following procedures transmission e Press the OK touch switch to re turn to the memory unit manual transmission screen make the correct settings then try again Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF correct the DIP switches settings of the memory unit then prohibited by the setting of SW2 1 or SW2 2 turn the power back ON Flash memory error An error occurred during initialization of the NT631 NT631C or memory unit flash memory or during write processing Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF then back ON If the error recurs the flash memory at the write destination may be faulty In this case replace the unit Verify error An error occurred during verification processing at the flash memory of the NT631 NT631C or the memory unit Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF then back ON If the error recurs the flash memory at the write destination may be faulty In this case replace the unit 49 SECTION 4 Connecting to the H
105. CQM1H the host link method can be used by installing a serial communication board In addition some C200HX HG HE Z E devices have an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link method by installing a communication board With the CPM2A and CPM2C an RS 422A type of 1 1 NT Link can be created through a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Check the model and series of the PC and the type of the installed Board or Unit before making a connection 96 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 The host units featuring the RS 422A 485 type host link function and can be con nected to the RS 422A 485 port of the NT631 NT631C are indicated in the table below Units with Built in Host Link Function CPUs Connectable with Host PC Series Host Link Unit Link Units or Expansion Com Communication Board CPU munication Board CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 EV1 CS1G CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 EV1 CS1H C1000H CPU01 EV1 C1000H C2000H CPU01 EV1 C2000H C200HS CPU01 03 21 23 31 33 E C200HS CPU01 21 EC C200HS C200HE CPU11 32 42 E C200HE C200HE CPU11 32 42 ZE C200HE ZE C200H LK202 V1 C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HG C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 ZE C200HG ZE C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C200HX C200HX C200HX ZE CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 ZE C200HE CPU32 42 E C200HE C200HE CPU32 42 ZE C200HE ZE C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HG C200HW COM03 06 EV1 C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 ZE C200HG ZE C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C series C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 ZE C1000H
106. CS is not displayed Display presence or absence of the response by pressing the Response touch switch The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed In this example serial port A is used bid Press the Quit touch switch e To quit the communications speed setting screen without setting the commu nications speed press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 and the previous communications speed remains in effect On completion of communications speed setting the NT631 NT631C returns to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the g next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 6 7 6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B Set the communication type RS 232C or RS 422A for serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below Ver
107. CS1H E V1 17 Communication with the Host Section 1 4 Features of the NT Link The NT631 NT631C also supports OMRON s high speed 1 N NT Link that pro vides faster 1 N communications The only PCs that support the high speed 1 N NT Link are the EV1 and higher versions of the CS1G CS1H PCs In the following sections the term NT Link is used to refer to the NT Link commu nication method in general the term 1 1 NT Link is used to refer specifically to NT Links with a 1 1 connection and the term 1 N NT Link is used to refer to both standard and high speed NT Links with 1 N connections When necessary the standard 1 N NT Link is distinguished from the high speed 1 N NT Link The NT link has the following features e High speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed The NT631 NT631C also supports OMRON s high speed 1 N NT Link e Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible This enables the other bits of words to which a touch switch has been allo cated to be allocated for other purposes e g a lamp However since data is written to the DM area in word units the other bits of words allocated to touch switches in this area cannot be used for other pur poses e The NT link can be used even when the PC is in the RUN mode When the host link method is used the NT631 NT631C switches to the monitor mode when the PC is in the RUN mode e In the case of PTs that support the standard 1 N NT L
108. CTS selection DIP SW2 and SW3 Set SW2 or SW to ON Set this always to OV To use communication port 1 set SW2 To use communication port 2 set SW3 I O port selector switch RS 232C I RS 422A Communication condition setting DIP SW1 Set this switch to OFF Communication is executed in accordance with the CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC The initial values for the system settings are as follows Communications speed 9600 bps Parity Even Xon Xoff control Not executed Communication method Full duplex Stop bits 2 stop bits Data length 7 bits Connecting to a CS1 series Serial Communication Unit 58 CS1 series Backplane mounted type CS1W SCU21 Setting The Front Switches Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch located on the front panel Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following Set the unit number to 0 through F so that it will not overlap with the numbers used in other units Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After the settings are written they become effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or execution of the S
109. CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 CV500 LK201 CVM1 CompoBus S master con trol unit SRM1 C02 V1 1 Use a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter to connect 2 The CQM1H CPU11 does not have a built in RS 232C port so connect to the peripheral port to the PT witha CS1W CN118 Connecting Cable 3 CPUs of CVM1 CV series PCs without the suffix EV Settings at The Host cannot be connected When using the host link method the settings shown below must be made at the host depending on the unit some of these settings may not be necessary or settings not shown here may be necessary 53 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Item Switch Setting I O port RS 232C Communications speed Set the same speed as for the NT631 NT631C 1 Transfer code ASCIl 7 data bits 2 stop bits Parity Even 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 Unit 00 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Setting the Host Link Method page 150 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT631 NT631C in a single host link The setting methods for each type of unit are described in
110. EVICE CHECK MENU t Quit Buzzer Check page 195 LED Check page 196 LCD Check page 198 t Backlight Check page 199 Screen Memory page 199 Touch Switch page 202 Battery page 204 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu Calling the System Menu This section describes how to use the menus including how to call the System Menu how to call the System Installer mode and how to select menu items The System Menu can be displayed by either of the following two methods e Touching the corners of the touch panel e Pressing a touch switch that displays the System Menu 129 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 Reference Reference Calling the System Installer Mode Selecting Menu Items 130 e If display of the System Menu is disabled by the setting made in the System Installer mode the System Menu cannot be displayed this does not apply if an error has occurred e At the same as the System Menu is displayed the operation of the NT631 NT631C stops and the RUN LED goes OFF Touching The Corners of The Touch Panel When two of the four corners of the touch panel see the figure below are touched simultaneously the System Menu is displayed RUN mode SYSTEM MENU __ Press any two of the four gt Transmit Mode corners at the same time Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Note that the touch switches used
111. Execute Printer Interface Check will be printed out at the printer e While data is being sent to the printer the message Checking Now is dis played e When the sending of data to the printer is completed Finished Normal by Print er Interface Check is displayed 210 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 e If data does not reach the printer within 60 seconds after sending starts the message Finished Printer output failed is displayed After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT631 NT631C returns to the I F CHECK MENU screen 6 12 Programming Console Function The NT631 NT631C has been equipped with the Programming Console func tion which allows it to be used like a C200H PRO27 E Programming Console for CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E CS1 se ries CS1G CS1H or SRM1 PCs Except for recording saving ladder programs on cassette tape and replaying reading them almost all the functions of a Programming Console can be executed Note When the programmable controller functions are used carefully check that the system is safe before carrying out the following operations e Changing monitor data e Switching the operating mode e Forced set or reset e Changing a present value or set value 211 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 6 12 1 Usable Systems The Programming Console function can be used with an NT631 NT631C con nected to a PC when using the
112. G2A6 LK201 EV1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 Delivered with the following units C500 LK203 Delivered with the following 25 pin type units Made by JAE 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 3G2A5 LK201 EV1 25 pin type XM2A 2501 ze Made by OMRON 25 pin type Made by OMRON XM2S 2511 Connector hood DB C2 J9 Tachii Electric TRVVBS4P 03 Wire Co Ltd 93 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 1 25 N3A Japan Solderless Recomended cablesive AWG22 to 18 Molex Inc 0 3 to 0 75 mm fork type Terminal MFG terminals Y1 25 3 5L fork type The terminal screws of the NT631 NT631C are M3 5 specification When wiring use crimp terminals for M3 5 use Tighten terminal screws with a tightening torque of 0 8 N m Note Always use crimp terminals for wiring Examples of applicable terminals Fork type Round type 7 mm or less 7 mm or less O 5 1 5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications The serial port B connector of the NT631 NT631C has a terminal resistance set ting terminal TRM In RS 422A 485 communications a terminal resistor must be set at the device at the end of the communication cable but not at any other device The NT631 NT631C has a built in terminal resistor and whether or not the ter minal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance setting terminals TRM The terminal resistance is 120 Q
113. H Printers that can emulate the PC PR201H made by NEC Corp ePCL5 Printers that conform to the PCL 5 printer control specifications Note that the NT631 can only be used with the monochrome Tone setting and does not support color printing For the NT631 the Print Method is fixed as Tone The default factory setting is ESC P e In addition to this setting NT631C has the Print Method setting page 164 e For details on the print function refer to 2 15 7 Print Function in the Reference Manual Set the printer controller setting by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press Printer Controller to display the re quired printer type The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 163 Various System Settings Section 6 9
114. MRON Cable AWG28 5P IFVV SB Multi core shielded cable made by Fujikura Ltd CA MA VV SB 5P 28AWG Multi core shielded cable made by Hitachi Cable Ltd One XM2S 0911 for PT and either one XM2S 0911 or 0913 for your personal computer are needed 263 Appendix G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader Refer to the following when making the cable for connection to a bar code reader Wiring Method NT631 NT631C side Bar code reader side Abbr Pin No Abbr 1 SD SD RD RD RS RS 232C _RS cs interface cs ER SG olol ni o lalsaAlol lnr SG When using the 5 V output of serial port A of the NT631 NT631C limit the cable length to within 2 m If a cable longer than 2 m is used connect an external power supply to the bar code reader Connector and Related Parts Use the parts which are specified by bar code reader and following recommended products when making the connecting cable Name Model Remarks Connector XM2A 0901 9 pin type made by OMRON PT side Connector hood XM2S 0911 9 pin made by OMRON Cable AWG28 5P IFVV SB Multi core shielded cable made by Fujikura Ltd CA MA VV SB 5P 28AWG Multi core shielded cable made by Hitachi Cable Ltd 265 Appendix H Making the Cable for Connection to a Printer The following product is recommended as the cable for connecting a
115. Memory Switch Display the fourth memory switch screen by pressing the 1 next screen or 1 previous screen touch switch Press the touch switch corresponding to the port at which the NT Link 1 1 method is to be set Comm A Method or Comm B Method to display the setting option NT Link 1 1 The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 7 4 Setting the NT Link 1 N Method Standard High speed Set the communication conditions for the NT Link 1 N method at serial port A or serial port B by following the operation from the System Menu shown below 152 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 The communications speed determines whether the 1 N NT Link is standard or high speed Standard Standard 1 N NT Link High speed High speed 1 N NT Link Ver 3 10 Select Maintenan
116. N OFF switching displays numeral memory table displays and character string memory table displays NT631 ST211 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 The following functions cannot be used e Analogue meter High definition font display Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs Memory link Window control from the host Multiple display of window screens Moving a window Additional data areas accessible in CS1 series PCs The CS1 series high speed 1 N NT Link Interlock function that controls touch switches numeral inputs and character string inputs Mathematical function Device Monitor function NT30 620 compatible mode Expanded capabilities for label guide character displays including multiple lines of text ON OFF switching displays numeral memory table displays and character string memory table displays Installation of system programs using memory unit is possible System program Ver 3 0 The following functions can not be used e Installation of system programs using memory unit e High definition font display All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used The system program s version can be checked from the System Menu 271 PTs High intensity EL display yellow ivory NT631 ST211 EV2 Appendix J Model List NT631 ST211B EV2 High intensity EL display yellow black NT631C ST141 EV2 STN color display ivory NT631 ST
117. N control standards ESC P 24 J83C color or ESC P 24 J82 monochrome e Memory unit pages 36 and 44 e NT MF261 made by OMRON e Support Tool page 33 NT series Support Tool Version 4 0 for Windows Made by OMRON e NT ZUCAT1 EV4 CD ROM version e System installer page 33 e System installer made by OMRON The system installer is supplied as a standard accessory with the Support Tool NT ZJCAT1 EV4 15 Communication with the Host Section 1 4 Reference The following optional devices are available All of them can be used either with NT631 or NT631C Replacement backlight NT631C CFLO1 for NT631C ST151L NT631C CFLO2 for NT631C ST141L Reflection suppressing protective NT610C KBA04 sheet 5 pcs set Chemical resistant cover NT625 KBA0O1 Replacement battery 3G2A9 BAT08 1 3 2 Connecting to the Host Reference The NT631 NT631C has the following two communication ports The serial port B is equipped with an RS 232C connector and an RS 422A 485 terminal block selectable by memory switch Serial Port A D SUB 9 pin connector For RS 232C use only The Support Tool and bar code readers can be con nected here Serial Port B D SUB 9 pin connector for RS 232C use only The Support Tool and bar code readers can be connected here or Terminal block for RS 422A 485 use only The host can be connected at either of these two ports The connection methods for each communication method a
118. NT631C 2 This is the capacity of the flash memory that stores screen data 3 The values are the same as the NT30 NT30C when the PT is in NT30 620 compatible mode 4 The window control area can be used only in the V The data areas listed below can be accessed in addition to the data areas accessible with the NT30 NT30C 5 EM banks EM_0 to EM_C Timer completion flags TU Counter completion flags CU Work areas WR Task flags TK HR area versions of the NT631 NT631C For differences in programming refer to Appendix B in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Refer ence Manual Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 1 2 5 Principal Functions of NT631 NT631C The following are the principal functions of the NT631 NT631C Functions relating to data display Character display Characters of various sizes can be displayed Characters can be flashed and displayed in reverse video High grade fonts are available for the characters with their size enlarged Graphic display Polylines rectangles polygons circles circular arcs and sector shapes can be displayed They can also be tiled with various patterns flashed or displayed in reverse video Memory data display The contents of character string memory tables and numeral memory tables can be displayed The contents of memory tables can be changed from the host Graph display Not only bar graphs but also broken li
119. NT631C at the end of the RS 485 cable x marked in the above figure using the short circuit tool supplied with the NT631 NT631C In order to avoid an FG ground loop make the connection between the connec tor hood and the shielding at the one side only Connecting an NT AL001 and Host z T631 NT631C NT AL001 Host l RS 232C Wiring when connecting a CS1 series CS1G H Serial Communications Board CQM1H Serial Communications Board or C series C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board Applicable units CS1G CPU42 E V1 CS1G CPU44 E V1 CS1H CPU63 E V1 CS1H CPU65 E V1 CS1H CPU67 E V1 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E 91 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port C200HX CPU34 Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE Usable Cables with Attached Connectors For host link 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link 5 V power supplied from PC XW2Z 070T 1 XW2Z 200T 1 SJ46006 102 SJ46006 202 NT AL001 side a Aa A RS 232C connector Abbreviation Pin number Connector Em e z 9 pin type Since the CS1G H CQM1H and C200HX HG HE Shielding wire 9 pin to 9 pin 0 7 m 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m 9 pin to 9 pin 1 m 9 pin to 9 pin 2 m PC side Pin number f Abbreviation Sonnoctor RS 232C connector 9 pin type
120. PC Type C series CPM1 CPM2A 30CD CPM2A 40CD CPM2A 60CD Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CPM2A CPM2C 10 CPM2C 20 The PC s communications connector can be split into an RS 232C port and peripheral port with a CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable The CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cables convert the connector to a single RS 232C or peripheral port C series CPM2C CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 EV1 CQM1 CPU42 EV1 CQM1 CPU43 EV1 CQM1 CPU44 EV1 CQM1 CPU45 EV1 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1 CQM1H CPU11 CQM1H CPU21 CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections The CQM1H CPU11 E has only a peripheral port C series CQM1H C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HS C200HE CPU32 Z C200HE CPU42 Z Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HE Z E C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU33 2E C200HG CPU63 Z Z Z Z Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HG Z E C200HX CPU34 Z C200HX CPU44 Z C200HX CPU54 Z C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE E E E E E E EC E EC
121. PCs a Serial Communications Board can be added to provide 1 1 NT Link communications Some C200HX HG HE Z E CPUs can be connected by the NT link 1 1 method by installing a Communication Board Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the connections The host units that can be connected to the NT631 NT631C by the NT Link 1 1 method using the RS 232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below 65 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host 66 PC Series C series CPUs with Built in NT Link Function C200HS CPU21 E EC C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E Section 4 1 CPUs Connectable with Expansion Communication Board 1 Connectable to C200HS C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HE CPU32 Z C200HE CPU42 Z C200HE ZE C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z C200HG CPU43 Z C200HG CPU53 Z C200HG CPU63 Z C200HG ZE C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E X200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE C200HX CPU34 Z C200HX CPU44 Z C200HX CPU54 Z C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE E E E E E E E E E E C200HxX ZE CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1 30CDR CPM1A 10CD CPM1A 20CD CPM1A 30CD CPM1A 40CD CPM2A 30CD CPM2A 40CD CPM2A 60CD CPM2C 10 CPM2C 20
122. Programmable Terminals Setup Manual NT631 and NT631C Programmable Terminals Setup Manual Produced July 2000 Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Z N WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury Z N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any thing else Visual Aids The following headings appear in th
123. S 422A type NT Link 1 1 meth od by installing a Serial Communications Board Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU before making the connections The host units that can be connected to the RS 422A port of the NT631 NT631C by the RS 422A type NT Link 1 1 method are indicated in the table below CPUs with Built in RS 422A type NT Link 1 1 eA C200HE CPU32 Z C200HE CPU42 C200HG CPU33 C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU63 C200HX CPU34 C200HX CPU44 C200HX CPU54 C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 61 CQM1H CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CV series 3 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 series 3 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 1 One of the following communication boards is required C200HW COM03 EV1 or C200HW COMO06 EV1 2 ACQM1H SCB41 E Serial Communication Board is required 3 CPUs of CVM1 CV series PCs without the suffix EVL cannot be connected PC Series Model Name C200HE Z E C200HG Z E C200HX Z E The NT Link 1 1 method cannot be used using RS 485 To use the NT Link 1 1 method connect by RS 422A The 1 1 NT Link connection using RS 422A 485 is not possible with the CPM1 CPM2A or CPM2C 106 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Settings at the Host The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the fo
124. Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows Wire selection WIRE Set to 4 4 wire type for RS 422A 107 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Terminator TERM Set to ON for termination ON Serial Communications Board Inner Board slot 1 Terminator Switch TERM Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE Set to 4 right side Using the NT Link 1 N Method Compatible Host Units The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the RS 422A 485 type NT Link 1 N method are the CS1G H C200HX HG HE Z E and CQM1H models only A Serial Communications Board or a communications board must be installed to make the connection Check the model and series of the PC against the type of CPU or communica tions board before making the connections The host units that can be connected to the RS 232C port of the NT631 NT631C by the RS 422A type NT Link 1 N function via a convertor are indicated in the table below PC CPUs with Built in CPU that becomes connectable Series RS 422A type by installing a communication Model Name NT Link 1 1 Function board CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 EV1 1 CS1G CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 EV1 1 CS1H C200HE CPU32 Z E 2 C200HE C200HE CPU42 Z E 2 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E 2 C200HG CPU53 Z E2 EEE C200HG CPU63 Z E 2 2 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E 2 Z Z C200HX
125. T631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen 164 Various System Settings Section 6 9 e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement Reference The NT631 NT631C has a function to prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display if no operation is performed for a certain period of time and then displaying character strings at random positions and in random colors the colors only change for the NT631C The Screen Saver Movement setting determines whether or not these character strings are displayed while the screen display is off If Display is selected the character string stored in character string memory table No 0 is displayed If Display erase is selected the character string is not displayed and the back light is also turned off while the screen display is off The default factory setting is Display erased The screen saver can be canceled and former screen redisplayed by any of the following operations e Touching any part of the touch panel e Screen switching due to PT status control area operations e Screen switching due to bit memory table operations e Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations e Changing the backlight mode e Screen printin
126. TUP command Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Allocation DM area CH In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings are shown Port 1 Port 2 m DM30000 100xunit CH Writing Value Settings host link mode 2 stop bits even parity data length 7 bits Communication speed 9600 bps Communication speed 19200 bps Transmit delay time 0 ms Connecting to a CPU Unit No CTS control Unit No 0 for host link CV series and CVM1 CV series EV_ CPU Units CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 PC Setup When connecting to a CVM1 CV series CPU set the following communication conditions for the PC Setup Item Setting at Host Communications speed Set the same speed as set at the NT631 NT631C 1 Stop bit 2 stop bits Parity Even Data length ASCII 7 bits Unit 00 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Setting the Host Link Method page 150 Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device e g CX Programmer or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU For details on the PC Setup refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV500 1000 2000 Op eration Manual Ladder Diagrams W202 E1 L
127. The following functions can be executed in the System Installer mode Installer Mode e Setting the display language e Clearing and installing system programs e Disabling enabling display of the System Menu e Disabling enabling writing to the screen data memory e Clearing screen data For details on these functions refer to 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode page 140 6 3 2 Menu Tree The System Menu allows the various functions of the NT631 NT631C to be executed by using touch switches displayed on the touch panel The menu tree starting from the System Menu is shown below For details on System Menu operations refer to 6 3 3 Operations with the Sys tem Menu page 129 128 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 The menu tree may differ according to the system program installed in the NT631 NT631C The menu tree for the system program that is installed in the NT631 NT631C on shipment is shown below SYSTEM INSTALLER MODE Exit System Installer Download System Program page 140 Change System Settings page 142 L_ Erase Screen Data page 143 SYSTEM MENU Quit t Transmit Mode page 144 Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MEMORY INIT MENU Quit Screen Data page 131 Display History page 133 Alarm History page 134 MEMORY SWITCH MENU Start up Wait Time page 159 Key Press Sound
128. U Units CS1 series CPU Unit CS1G H CPULILI E V1 PC Setup Area Settings When connecting to a CS1 series CPU set the following communication condi tions for the PC Setup area in accordance with the communication port to be used When using the built in RS 232C port of CS1G H Writing Value Settings 8200 NT link 1 N mode 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate standard 000 The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex When using the peripheral port of CS1G H Writing Value Settings 8200 NT link 1 N mode 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate standard 000 The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex When connecting PT with its model number 0 2 5 to the built in RS 232C port for example set the value 8200 Hex to 160 CH and 0005 Hex to 166CH Either set PC Setup directly from a Programming Device Programming Con sole or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device CX Program mer to the CPU For details on PC Setup refer
129. U01 03 21 23 31 33 E C200HE CPU11 32 42 E C200HE CPU11 32 42 ZE C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 ZE C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 ZE C200H LK201 EV1 C200HS C200HE C200HE Z C200HG C200HG Z C200HX C200HX Z C200HS CPU21 23 31 33 E C200HE CPU42 E C20HE CPU42 ZE C200HE CPU32 42 E C200HE CPU32 42 ZE C200HG CPU43 63 E C200HG CPU43 63 ZE C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 E C200HG CPU33 43 53 63 ZE C200HX CPU44 64 E C200HX CPU44 64 65 85 ZE C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 E C200HX CPU34 44 54 64 65 85 ZE C200HW COM02 04 05 06 EV1 C200HS C200HE C200HE Z C200HG C200HG Z C200HX C200HX Z C1000H CPU01 EV1 C2000H CPU01 EV1 C500 LK201 EV1 C1000H C2000H C1000H CPU01 EV1 C1000HF CPU01 EV1 C2000H CPU01 EV1 C500 LK203 C1000H F C2000H CPM1 10 20 30CDR CPM1 CIFO1 CPM1A 10 20 30 40CDL1 CPM1 CIF0O1 CPM2A 30 40 60CDLIL CPM1 CIF01 Peripheral port connection CPM2A CPM2C 10 20 C1 CPM2C CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 42 43 44 EV1 CQM1 CQM1H CPU11 21 51 61 2 CQM1H CPU51 61 CQM1H SCB41 CQM1H CV Series 1 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 LK201 CV500 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CVM1 Series 1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2
130. W CN118 is required 212 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 Reference Note that the Programming Console function cannot be used with CPM1 CQM1 and C200HX HG HE Z E PCs of the following lot numbers CPM1 5 6 where is anumber in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y CQM1 3 4 5 6 where is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y C200HX HG HE 5 6 where is a number in the range 1 to 9 or the letter X or Y 6 12 2 Connection Method CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E or SRM1 CPM1 or CPM2A CPM2C CS1G CS1H The connection method is exactly the same as for the NT Link 1 1 Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connect ing to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC When using the Programming Console function with a CQM1H turn ON pin 7 of the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H s CPU Unit The connection method is the same as for the NT Link 1 1 With a CPM1 con nect the RS 232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC The connection method is the same as for the
131. W3 1 SW3 3 and SW3 5 to ON 1 Set SW3 2 SW3 4 and SW3 6 to OFF 0 Set terminator ON Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting to a CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit CVM1 CV series rack mounting type CV500 LK201 A CVM1 CV series host link unit CV500 LK201 has two connectors commu nication ports 1 and 2 To use the RS 422A type host link method set commu nication port 2 to RS 422A Communication port 2 is a 9 pin connector which allows selection of the RS 232C or RS 422A method When this port is used with the RS 422A method the I O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS 422A the lower position CPU Bus Unit Settings When connecting to a CVM1 CV series host link unit set the following commu nication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings Item Setting at Host Communications speed Set the same speed as for the NT631 NT631C 1 Transfer code ASCIl 7 data bits 2 stop bits Parity Even 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Setting the Host Link Method page 148 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT631 NT631C in a single host link Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device e g CX P
132. When carrying out RS 422A 485 communications using serial port B short be tween TRM and RDA terminals at the NT631 NT631C at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Leave these terminals open at NT631 NT631C units other than the one at the end of the cable When not using RS 422A 485 communications the terminal resistance setting is ineffective Short circuit tool TRM RDA terminals Function Terminal resistance is applied Short only at the NT631 NT631C connected to the end of an RS 422A 485 cable Terminal resistance is not applied Leave the terminals open when connecting an NT631 NT631C anywhere other than at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Note Before connecting or disconnecting cables between devices make sure that the power supply to all of the connected devices NT631 NT631C PC etc is OFF 94 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Reference The internal circuit of the NT631 NT631C is shown below Terminal resistor 120 Q Making a connection here inserts a terminator between RM RDB and RDA RDB e For details on setting the terminal resistance of NT AL001 refer to Settings at the RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit NT AL001 page 84 5 2 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port The methods for connecting the RS 422A 485 port of the NT631 NT631C and the RS 422A 485 port of the host are described here There are the following methods The foll
133. X HG HE Z E communication board as follows Switch 1 Set to 4 4 wire type for RS 422A or Set to 2 2 wire type for RS 485 Switch 2 Set to ON for terminator ON termination resistance applied Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows Wire selection WIRE Set to 4 4 wire type for RS 422A or Set to 2 2 wire type for RS 485 Terminator TERM Set to ON for termination ON Serial Communications Board Inner Board slot 1 Terminator Switch TERM Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE When using RS 422A Set to 4 right side for 4 wire type When using RS 485 Set to 2 left side for 2 wire type Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Board Serial Communications Board with RS 422A 485 port equipped for CS1 series CPU type CS1W SCB41 The port 2 is RS 422A 485 port 109 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Setting the Front Switches m RDY m COMM1 COMM2 Port 1 RS 232C Terminal resistance setting switch TER Set to ON Terminal resistance is present right side Two wire type four wire type changeover switch WIRE For RS 422A 4 4 wire type right side For RS 485 2 2 wire type left side Port 2 RS 422A 485 Allocation DM Area Seitings for CPU Settings are written from the Pro
134. Z The 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link can be used The connection method is exactly the same as for the 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC The 1 1 NT Link can be used The connection method is exactly the same as for the 1 1 NT Link Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC The 1 1 NT Link can be used in all CPUs and the 1 N NT Link can also be used in V2 and higher versions of the SRM1 The connection method is exactly the same as for the 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link With a CPM1 connect the RS 232C cable to the peripheral port via a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port for details on connecting to the PC The 1 1 NT Link can be used The connection method is the same as for the NT Link 1 1 Connect to the PC s communications connector with a CPM2C CN111 or CS1W CN114 118 Connecting Cable a CPM1 CIFO1 RS 232C Adapter or a CPM1 CIF11 RS 422A Adapter CQM1 or C200HS CPM1 CPM2A or SRM1 CPM2C 218 Version Display Section 6 14 Refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section
135. actual system menu operations refer to 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function page 177 Settings at the NT631 NT631C Item Possible Settings Default Setting Settings at the Bar Code Reader Data bits 7 or 8 bits 7 bits Stop bit s 1 or 2 bits 2 bits Parity None odd even Even Communications speed 4800 9600 19200 bps 9600 bps Input Method Manual Auto Manual Make the settings shown in the table below at the bar code reader Make sure that the communications speed parity stop bit and data bit settings match the communication settings made at the NT631 NT631C For details on the setting method refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used Item Possible Settings Communications speed 4800 9600 19200 bps Parity EVEN ODD NONE Stop bits 1 or 2 bits Data bits 7 or 8 bits Preamble STX Postamble ETX RS CS control Available Communication protocol No protocol mode Transmission of number of bar code label digits Transmission prohibited Transmission of ID characters Transmission prohibited Bar code types Multi reading all types can be read Trigger switch setting About RS CS Control Automatic reading mode During bar code reading the NT631 NT631C performs RS CS control When the Input Method setting of the NT631 NT631C is set to Auto the RS signa
136. ade by Hitachi Ltd Cables with Connectors Made by OMRON When connecting an NT ALO01 and a PC use the OMRON cables with connec tors indicated in the table below Cable Length Connector Specification XW2Z 200S 9 pin lt 25 pin XW2Z 500S Host link NT Link 1 1 XW2Z 200T 9 pin amp 9 pin XW2Z 500T Host link NT Link 1 1 9 pin 9 pin Host link NT Link 1 1 5 V power supply wire attached Use when the PC does not have a 5 V output J45007 102 J45007 202 9 pin amp 9 pin Host link NT Link 1 1 NT Link 1 N 5 V power supplied from PC Use when the PC has a 5 V output 9 pin 9 pin Host link NT Link 1 1 NT Link 1 N 5 V power supplied from PC 994600620 Use when the PC has a 5 V output XW2Z 070T 1 XW2Z 200T 1 SJ46006 102 Note 1 The maximum tensile load of the recommended cable is 30 N Do not ex ceed this load 2 After connecting a connecting cable always tighten the connector screws Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals for RS 422A 485 When making an RS 422A 485 connecting cable as far as possible use the rec ommended parts indicated in the table below Some units come supplied with one connector and connector hood Check the required parts and prepare them in advance Remarks Delivered with the following units C500 LK203 Connector Delivered with the following 25 pin type units Petes pie by JAE 3
137. ads ces A eek A a veh a ees 219 6 14 1 Method of Use 0 eee pret 220 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 2 221 TPL Troubleshootng na senan ns E REER Ht ARG Oe ONS Shae ee BOS 222 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 0 0000 e eee eee 225 7 2 1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies 225 7 2 2 Errors Occurring during Operation and Their Remedies 227 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transmission 228 7 2 4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies 229 7 2 5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies 229 7 3 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C 0 0 eee eee 231 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery 0 0 cee eee eee 237 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning 0 0 0 cece eee nee 238 Appendix sis cose chee ee eee ees ee E a EME S Eee eee 241 A Specifications eeo ios sag ERR Awake ee BEA als Sha ee 241 BS Dimensions is a E sh be ef age baie Hey Se NEES oe hae Hae eels 249 C Using an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit 0 000 000 0002 253 D Transporting and Storing the NT631 NT631C 0 0 000008 259 E Makine the Cable c0s2 eosin te shed a dea eae ieee Meehan de bha ENEN eels 261 F Making the Cable for Connecting aPC 0 ee eee 263 G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader 265 H Making
138. age 180 Parity bit Sets the parity bit for the data None odd even Page 180 Communications Sets the communications speed for the bar code reader 4800 9600 or 19200 bps Page 180 speed Input method Sets the method for confirming data when it is input to a Manual Auto Page 180 character string input field Manual The data is confirmed with a touch switch The data can be corrected and character strings can be added Auto The data is automatically confirmed when it is in put Default factory setting 178 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Section 6 10 Setting the _ Set the bar code reader communication conditions and method of confirmation Communication at input by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Conditions and Setting Method Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the fourth memory switch setting screen Press Comm A Method to select Bar Code Reader The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed Host Link Sot 179 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Section 6 10 180 Press the Set touch switch to the right of Comm A Method Display the required setting for each item by pressing the touch switches The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed
139. al port PRO Mem SW1 OFF SW2 ON Sw Swe e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port PRO on ON roam SW1 OFF Tiere SW2 OFF Setting the Switches on an RS 232C Adapter When using a CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter set the mode switch as shown in the following diagram CPM1 CIFO1 Set the mode setting switch to NT lower position a 68 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Connecting to CVM1 CV Series EV Set the DIP switches on the front panel as follows oooaad I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C DIP switch setting SW3 ON right side 6 5 4 _ Set SW3 to use NT Link 3 2 1 When using the CVM1 CV series CPU execution processing execution control 2 in the PC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing Using the NT Link 1 N Method Compatible Host Units The OMRON PCs that can be connected using the NT link 1 N method are the CS1 series CS1G H and the C series C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H and SRM1 only With the CS1 series PCs it is possible to connect a 1 N NT Link us ing a CS1W SCU21 Serial Communications Unit Check the model and series of the PC as well as the model of Serial Commu nications Board or Unit being used before making the connections The host units that ca
140. al port 1 2 e Set SW5 to OFF establishing communication in ac LJ cordance with PC Setup when connecting the NT631 NT631C to a peripheral port PERIPHERAL connection to the RS 232C unit This also supports the CX Programmer Allocation DM area CH is i PORT Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS 232C port for CS1 series CPU Units CS1W SCB41 21 Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After the settings are written they become effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or execution of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings are shown Writing Value Settings Port 1 Port 2 DM32000 DM32010 8000 Host link mode 2 stop bits even parity data length 7 bits DM32001 0000 Communication speed 9600 bps DM32011 ag 0007 Communication speed 19200 bps DM32002 DM32012 0000 Transmit delay time 0 ms DM32006 DM32016 0000 No CTS control Unit No 0 for host link When Using the NT Link 1 1 Method Compatible Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the NT link 1 1 function built in With CQM1H
141. an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit This section outlines the external dimensions procedure for mounting and removal and specifications of an RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT ALO01 E Refer to this information when designing the control panel For details refer to the instruction manual supplied with the NT ALO01 E Dimensions 110 4 33 jii 4 0 16 74 5 2 93 EEN 100 2 3 94 _ gt 105 4 13 max Est Units mm inch 30 W 114 H 100 2 D mm with the RS 422A terminal block cover closed 30 W 114 H 119 5 D mm with the RS 422A terminal block cover open Methods for Mounting and Removal The RS 232 RS 422 convertor unit NT ALO01 E can be mounted on a DIN rail or in an operation panel The RS 422A terminal block of the convertor unit can be easily removed Mounting to a DIN Rail Latch the top part of the rear face of the convertor unit a in the figure onto the top edge of the DIN rail and push the unit in the direction indicated by b in the figure Now fit end plates at the right and left of the convertor unit to secure it and ensure that it cannot shift laterally 253 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit Appendix C Removal from a DIN Rail Remove the end plates at right and left of the convertor unit and as shown in the figure below insert a flat blade screwdriver into the rail stopper at the bottom face of the co
142. ance with changes in bit memory table statuses For the alarm list a series of bit memory tables are monitored and messages contents of character string memory tables set for bit memory tables that come ON are displayed For the alarm history bit memory tables for which the history property is set are continually monitored and the time when they come ON and number of times they come ON are recorded and displayed together with the message charac ter string set for the bit memory table The NT631 NT631C allows selection of the display order as the newest record first or the oldest record first by memory switch setting The alarm list function is used to determine which bits are ON at the present time The alarm history function is used to determine the times at which alarms occurred in the past and how many times alarms have occurred Alarm List Message character string table No 32 set for bit memory table No 14 3 Character string table No 32 Character string table No 50 Image library data 1002 HOST o A000000 L001003 1 ON D010015 Character string table No 32 Image library data 113C zZ o va a i 1 i 1 o Image library data 113C Character string table No 54 Image library data 1125 When the message displayed is pressed the image library data 113C set for bit memory table No 14 is displayed Alarm History
143. ance with the host program If the screens do not switch correctly check the connection between the host and the NT631 NT631C and also check if the hardware settings are correct For details refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port e Confirm that the operation results of touch switch and numeric value character string input at the NT631 NT631C are sent to the host correctly by displaying the contents of the host words and bits using a Programming Device e g CX Programmer If the results of operations at the NT631 NT631C are not sent to the host correctly check the setting of the display elements For details on setting display elements refer to the description of each display element in the Ref erence Manual 6 9 Various System Settings 158 The NT631 NT631C allows a variety of functions which are convenient during operation to be set with memory switches This section describes the memory switch settings relating to the operation environment Since the memory switch settings are backed up to the flash memory by the bat tery in the NT631 NT631C they are not cleared when the power is switched OFF Various System Settings Section 6 9 6 9 1 Memory Switch Setting Screens There are four memory switch setting screens The required screen can be dis played by using the next screen and previous screen touch switches The fou
144. and operate the Programmable Terminal Section 1 provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the PTs types of connec tion communication methods etc This information will enable you to understand the applications of the PTs Section 2 describes the connection methods that are possible with the PTs and the functions of the parts of PTs as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices Section 3 describes the settings of the PTs and methods for connection to peripheral devices Section 4 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 232C port of the PT Section 5 describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 422A 485 port of the PT Section 6 describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start the PT Func tions that are convenient when using the PT and those that are useful for system maintenance are also explained here Section 7 describes the action to take when errors occur in the PT and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors The Appendices provide specifications dimensions procedures for using an RS 232C RS 422A Con vertor Unit procedures for transporting and storing the PT information on cable preparation information on the relationship between the system program and hardware and product lists WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this
145. anel and connect the power to the NT631 NT631C as described below 3 1 1 Installation Environment Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel Note 1 Do not install the unit at sites subject to the following conditions e Severe temperature variations e Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications e High humidity condensation e Splashing chemical agents e Severe oil splashing e Corrosive or flammable gases e Strong vibrations or shocks e Direct exposure to wind and rain outdoor sites e Strong ultra violet irradiation 2 Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the unit is used at a location subject to any of the following conditions e Static electricity or noise from other equipment e Strong electromagnetic fields e Nearby power cables e Potential exposure to radioactivity 3 1 2 Installation in the Operation Panel The NT631 NT631C is mounted in an operation panel by embedding it in the panel Use the panel fittings and tool Philips screwdriver included in the product pack age and follow the procedure below 1 2 3 1 Open a hole of the dimensions shown below in the panel and install the NT631 NT631C from the front side of the panel 2 Attach the panel fittings at the following positions shown below from the rear of the NT631 NT631C Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw with the Philips head screwdri
146. as two communication ports Their uses are indicated in the table below Usable Communication Meth Communication Port da Communication Type Host link NT Link 1 1 NT Link 1 N Memory link Support Tool connection bar code reader input function Serial port A RS 232C Host link RS 232C NT Link 1 1 Connector NT Link 1 N oe port Memory link Terminal Host link RS 422A 485 a k a NT Link 1 1 select between conne oc NT Link 1 N ctor and terminal block There are two NT Link 1 N communications rates standard and high speed Communication Methods That Can Be Used with the Host The following communication methods can be used with the hosts that can be connected to the NT631 NT631C e RS 232C e RS 422A e RS 485 The communication types that are actually supported differ depending on the host unit For details refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port Converting the Communication Type with an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit The following communication type conversions are possible by using an RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit NT AL001 made by OMRON e RS 232C RS 422A e RS 232C RS 485 select between conne ctor and terminal block 24 Method for Connection to the Host Section 2 1 Communica tion Type at PT RS 232C Communica tion Type at Host RS
147. ation port or execution of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown Allocation DM area CH Port 1 Port 2 DM32000 DM32010 8200 NT link 1 N mode DM32001 DM32011 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate standard Writing Value Settings The largest model number of DM32006 DM32016 000 the connected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex When connecting PTs with model numbers 3 to 6 to port 1 for example set the value 8200 Hex to DM82000 0000 Hex to DM32001 and 0006 Hex to DM32006 Connecting to CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit A CS1 series backplane mounted type CS1W SCU21 Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 located on the front panel Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following Set the unit number to 0 through F so that it will not overlap with the numbers used in other units Allocation DM Area Seitings for CPU Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directl
148. aults such as incipient disconnection Visual inspection Components Brightness of the backlight Must be sufficiently bright Visual inspection with limited NT631C only Backlight life lives Under the normal range of ambient temperature and humidity NT631C ST141 J EV2 Approx 25 000 hours or longer NT631C ST151 J EV2 Approx 30 000 hours or longer Brightness setting is not available for the NT631C ST151LJ EV2 Note 1 Do not disassemble for repairs or modification 2 The disposal of the unit including batteries to be disposed and backlight may be regulated by national or local authorities Dispose of them in accor dance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local author ity Reference Desire on replacing the NT631 NT631C When replacing the NT631 NT631C after discovering a fault during inspections note the following points e Be sure to switch the power OFF before starting replacement e After replacement check that the new NT631 NT631C is not subject to the same error e If a faulty unit is returned for repairs write as detailed a description of the fault as possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON ad dress indicated on the back cover of this book 239 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications Specification NT631 ST211 EV2 NT631C ST141 EV2 NT631C ST151 Rated power supply voltage 24 VDC A
149. aused data corruption during communication Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 The PC is transmitting incorrect data Check the operation at the host side Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Error Details Time out Error Displayed Probable Cause The connecting cables are not connected correctly Send Receive Section 7 3 Check the communication cable connection and perform a conductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable For details on communication cables refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port The communication service of the host is stopped Send Receive Check that the host is capable of communicating with the NT631 NT631C confirm that the communication settings of the host and NT631 NT631C match Time out Interval is too short Send Set a longer value for Time out Interval at the host side Time out Interval is too short Receive Set a longer value for Time out Interval in the System Menu 6 9 12 Setting the Time out Interval page 174 It may also be possible to solve the problem by shortening the host cycle time PC Unit No Error The unit does not match that set on the PC Re set the unit number at the host side to 0 Noise caused data corruption during communication Carry out grounding wo
150. ay history record Display and printing of display history record data Page 188 Alarm history record Display and printing of alarm history record data Page 190 Screen data check Display of each screen stored in the NT631 NT631C Page 192 VO Device check Checking of the I O functions of the NT631 NT631C Page 195 check I F check Checking of the communication functions of the NT631 NT631C Page 205 6 11 1 I O Settings Contrast Adjustment for NT631C ST141L EV1 only This section describes how to use these functions This function is used to adjust the contrast of the display panel and the bright ness of the backlight With the NT631 631C you can adjust the contrast and brightness settings using either of the following two methods Setting from the System Menu Adjusting the contrast Select System Menu Maintenance Mode I O Settings Contrast Adjust Adjusting the brightness Select System Menu Maintenance Mode I O Settings Brightness Adjust Setting Using Special Screen During PT Operation You can set the brightness and contrast by displaying the screen with the follow ing number using a touch switch with a switch screen function or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area Screen number 9030 Brightness and contrast adjustment screen The NT631C ST141 J EV1 allows the contrast to be adjusted in 100 steps The CONTRAST ADJUST screen enables you to make t
151. bort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 8 Setting the Screen Saver Start up Time The NT631 NT631C has a function to maximize the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage by turning off the screen display and the backlight if no operation is performed for a certain period of time 166 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Reference The Screen Saver Start up Time setting determines the time interval before the screen saver function operates The setting range is 0 to 255 minutes The default factory setting is 10 minutes If 000 is set the screen saver function does not operate The screen saver can be canceled and previous screen redisplayed by any of the following operations e Touching any part of the touch panel e Screen switching due to PT status control area operations e Screen switching due to bit memory table operations e Execution of any of the following PT status control bit operations e Changing the backlight mode e Screen printing change from OFF to ON e Screen display change from OFF to ON e Itis possible to display the character string stored in character string memory table No 0 at random positions and in random colors while the screen display is off For details refer to 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement page 165 Note however that when this feature is used the backli
152. ce Mode Select Memory Switch Display the fourth memory switch screen by pressing the 1 next screen or T previous screen touch switch Press the touch switch corresponding to the port at which the NT Link 1 N method stan dard or high speed is to be set Comm A Method or Comm B Method to display the setting option NT Link 1 N The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed In this example serial port A is used 153 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches Section 6 7 154 Reference Press the Set touch switch to the right of the port at which the setting has been made In this example serial port A is used Press the Unit No touch switch to display the unit number to be set Press the Comm Speed touch switch to display the commu nications speed standard or 115 2 kbps high speed The Comm Speed setting de m road tarder termines which method of 1 N NT Link is used The setting option changes each time the bert touch switch is pressed In this example seri 4 al port A is used for a standard 1 N NT Link Press Quit T Linky LM The unit number is set mele e To quit the unit number communications speed setting screen without confirm ing the unit number communications speed settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the memory switch setting screen 4 4 with the
153. communication method indicated below Communica Communica tion Method tion Type Applicable PCs Connected Port C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU63 Z C200HX CPU44 Z C200HX CPU64 Z C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CPM2A 30CDUIL CPM2A 40CDLUIL CPM2A 60CDLIL CPM2C 10 NT Link 1 1 CPM2C 20 CQM1 CPU40 EV1 1 CQM1H CPU21 1 CQM1H CPU51 1 CQM1H CPU61 1 RS 232C SRM1 C02 V2 CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1A 10CDL CPM1A 20CDL CPM1A 30CDL CPM1A 40CDL CS1G CPU42 EV1 CS1G CPU43 EV1 CS1G CPU44 EV1 es CS1G CPU45 EV1 Si gt A EN NT Link 1 N CS1H CPU63 EV1 seater sf CS1H CPU64 EV1 4 CS1H CPU65 EV1 CS1H CPU66 EV1 CS1H CPU67 EV1 Z CPU built in RS 232C port Peripheral port 3 1 The peripheral port Programming Console always has priority If a Programming Console is connected later the Programming Console function of the NT631 NT631C is invalidated and operation from the NT631 NT631C becomes impossible 2 The CPM2C CN111 Connecting Cable splits the PC s Communication Port into a RS 232C port and a peripheral port 3 An RS 232C cable cannot be connected to the peripheral port An RS 232C adapter CPM1 CIF01 is required 4 The RS 232C cable cannot be directly connected to the peripheral port An RS 232C converting cable CS1
154. cted in a 1 N connection is described here CS1G H C200HX HG HE Z E i 9 pin connector RS 485 cables max total length 500 m NT631 NT631C Serial port B RS 422A 485 terminal block Reference Communication using the RS 485 type standard NT Link 1 N method is possible only when a CS1W SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a CS1 series CS1G H a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX HG HE Z E or a CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed ina CQM1H e Communication using the RS 485 type high speed NT Link 1 N method is possible only when a CS1W SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed ina CS1 series CS1G H 118 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting between NT631 NT631C Units Connecting an NT631 NT631C anda Host NT631 NT631C Host RS 485 3 x NT631 NT631C side Short circuit tool NT631 NT631C side RDA TRM alalololalalolalale tt RS 422A terminal a terminal Functional Shielding wire 2 Pee D Hn GUS o gt DS D D2 Dy VV MO DAD tnn 0 0 O B OB on gt DS DES 24V J DC 24V DC Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631 NT631C at the end of the RS 485 cable x marked in the above figure using the short circuit tool supplied with the NT631 NT631C In order to avoid an FG g
155. ction 6 14 Checking the Backlight Check if the backlight functions normally with the NT631C by following the menu for NT631C only operation from the System Menu shown below This function is not available with the NT631 Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode EAST jat liti Select I O Check Select Device Check Select Backlight Check e If the backlight is normal it flashes At this time the Backlight Check touch switch is displayed in reverse video e To end the backlight check press the Backlight Check touch switch again Aen Data Memory Check if the screen data memory is functioning normally heck 199 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Reference In the screen data memory check a write test is performed on the screen data memory Since all the screen data in the NT631 NT631C is lost in this check confirm that this data is backed up at the Support Tool or memory unit before executing it e f writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting for System Set tings in the System Installer mode it is not possible to execute a screen data check e Once a screen data check has been started it cannot be stopped 200 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Check the screen data memory by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select Device Check S
156. d Memory unit Bank 1 e If screen data is selected PT screen fixed Memory unit Bank 0 1 PT system screen fixed Reference When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously from the PT to the memory unit the setting of banks is Bank 0 system program Bank 1 screen data and when transmitting them from the memory unit to the PT either of the following combinations must be used Bank 0 system program Bank 1 other than system program Bank 0 other than system program Bank 1 system program e When writing the system program into the NT631 NT631C the type of system program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding 4 Press Execute The data is transmitted The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played in accordance with the progress of data transmission At the same time the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of the number of bytes and blocks 1 bank 16 block 1024k byte When the data transmission is operated manually RUN LED remains OFF 5 Switch the NT631 NT631C power OFF remove the memory unit then switch the NT631 NT631C power back ON Errors When Using a If an error occurs when using the memory unit the NT631 NT631C operates as Memory Unit follows e The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen Each screen has touch switches to change the display language fr
157. d Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port In an RS 422A 485 connection the terminator setting is incorrect Make the NT631 NT631C and PC termination resistance settings correctly Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port and Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port In an NT link 1 N connection there is duplication in the unit numbers Make the settings again so that there is no duplication 6 7 4 Setting the NT Link 1 N Method Standard High speed page 152 The power to the NT631 NT631C NT ALO01 or host is OFF Check the power supply The buzzer has sounded and the RUN LED is OFF Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 The NT631 NT631 has developed trouble Contact your OMRON service center The touch panel does not respond Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 The touch panel is broken Test the touch panel with I O Check in the MAINTENANCE MODE menu If there is an error contact your OMRON service center The PC mode has changed to the monitor mode 222 The NT631 NT631C changes the mode when Host Link communication is used This is an NT631 NT631C specification When using a PC that can also be connected usin
158. d on the NT631 NT631C by using the Support Tool For details on creating screen data refer to the NT series Support Tool Ver 4 1 for Windows Operation Manual V061 E1 L Turn ON the power to the NT631 NT631C If no screen data has been registered an error message is displayed In this case press the OK touch switch on the error message screen to display the Sys tem Menu If screen data has been registered and the RUN mode is established perform the appropriate operations on the touch panel to display the System Menu If necessary initialize the memory of the NT631 NT631C by operation from the System Menu Connect the Support Tool to the NT631 NT631C and transmit the screen data from the Support Tool to the NT631 NT631C For details on connecting the Support Tool refer to 3 2 Connecting to the Sup port Tool page 33 Select the System Menu and set the operations of the NT631 NT631C for ex ample the conditions for communication with the host using the memory switches Connect the NT631 NT631C to the host and start operation If an error occurs during operation check the I Os settings etc by referring to this guide 125 Starting the NT631 NT631C Section 6 2 6 2 Starting the NT631 NT631C After checking that the hardware has been connected correctly switch on the power to the NT631 NT631C to start it up This section describes the operation of the NT631 NT631C when it is started up 6
159. d or Unit For details refer to Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 73 Settings at the Host The Settings required for each Unit are described below e Connecting a C series C200HX HG HE Z E CQM1H or SRM1 PC Setup Area Settings Write the PC Setup area data memory settings directly from a Programming Device e g CX Programmer in accordance with the host model and port Writing Connection to Value Setting C200HX HG HE Z E SRM1 Built in RS 232C port C200HX HG HE Z E Use NT link 1 N Communication Board port A DM6555 highest unit number of CQMI1H port 172 ie connected PTs 1 to 7 C200HX HG HE Z E Communication Board port B 1 DM6645 DM6550 1 RS 232C port on the Communications Board 2 RS 232C port on the Serial Communications Board 3 When using a C200HE Z E the maximum PT unit number is 3 70 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Refer to the PC s operation manual for details on changing PC Setup settings Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX HG HE Z E When using a C200HX HG HE Z E the DIP switches on the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PC Setup area data memory effective RS 232C port communication condition setting Set DIP SW5 to OFF to make the settings made in PC Setup effective Ufr ON Connecting to CS1 series CP
160. d polygons can be used for lamps normal standard lamps In accordance with the status of the host bit they can be lit displayed in reverse video or flashed repeated alternation between nor mal and reverse video display states Lamps can also display different image library data for the ON and OFF states of the host bit such lamps are called image library lamps There are four standard lamp labels fixed display character strings ON OFF switching character strings numeral displays and character string displays When fixed display character strings or ON OFF switching character strings are used several lines of labels can be displayed Normal Standard Lamps ee E ON ON Host Unlit state Lit state Image Library Lamps ON Host Unlit state Lit state Touch Switches These switches can be set at any location on the screen Pressing a touch switch on the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the following effects Notification to a host bit input notification function Changing the displayed screen screen switching function Input of a numeric value or character string input key function Copying of a numeric value or character string copy key function Shifting to another numeric value or character string input field cursor mov ing key function Obtaining a hard copy of the screen screen print function Opening Closing a window Moving a wi
161. d simultaneously in the normal screen A 9 word window control area has been allocated to the host the contents of these 9 words can be changed from the Host to open close and move windows 1 2 2 Comparison between NT631 and NT631C Two NT631 models the NT631 which is capable of versatile graphic displays EL display yellow and the NT631C which is also capable of color display are available The differences between the NT631 and NT631C are tabled be low Function NT631 ST211L EV1 NT631C ST141 EV1 NT631C ST151L EV1 Type NT631 ST211 EV2 Beige NT631 ST211B EV2 Black NT631C ST141 EV2 Beige NT631C ST141B EV2 Black NT631C ST151 EV2 Beige NT631C ST151B EV2 Black Display Monochrome EL display STN color LCD display TFT color LCD display panel with white backlight with white backlight Beige and black are the front panel colors of each NT631 NT631C types 1 2 3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions High speed 1 N NT Link Additional Mathematical Functions Device Monitor Function The V2 versions of NT631 NT631C are supplemented and enhanced by the fol lowing functions The V2 versions are compatible with the high speed 1 N NT Link as well as the earlier standard 1 N NT Link Operands values referenced by formula can be registered to allow the PT to perform calculations automatically and write the results of those
162. d to display ON or OFF The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the g next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 4 Setting the Buzzer Sound The NT631 NT631C has a function for sounding a buzzer in response to an instruction from the host or when an error occurs It is possible to set whether or not the buzzer actually sounds with the memory switches e ON The buzzer sounds in response to instructions and when an error occurs e OFF The buzzer does not sound in response to instructions or when errors occur e ERROR ON The buzzer sounds only when an error occurs The default factory setting is OFF 161 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Reference There are other instructions and settings relating to the buzzer but this memory switch setting has the highest priority e For details on the buzzer refer to 2 15 5 Buzzer Function in the Reference Manual Set the
163. displayed at Received Data in hexadecimal e f a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions with the host a communication error screen is displayed Since this indicates that there is a communication fault check the communication cables and set tings For NT Link 1 1 1 N Standard or 1 N High speed Example Serial port B while using the NT Link 1 N x h ttir Yr H k y orn F i Fi it EE LE t Fma i sending Data H H H i i ha hit i i oo t C PE Ee Ee EN E E St ee ek Pb Rescind Data ic bk ie jot bi ni tk Soc st 208 bk an G H H HHGH pany Press Execute to start the check The data for checking communication is sent to the host and is displayed as symbols at Sending Data e If communication with the host is normal the reply from the host is displayed at Received Data as symbols e f a communication error occurs while checking the communication conditions with the host a communication error screen is displayed Since this indicates that there is a communication fault check the communication cables and set tings 207 System Maintenance Section 6 14 For Memory Link Example Serial port A while using the memory link The check is started as soon as the check screen is displayed Send the com mand from the host e f communication with the host is normal the data received from the host is dis played in hexadecimal text code at Received Data e If nothing is
164. displayed at Received Data when the command is sent from the host there is a communication fault check the communication cables and set tings For a Bar Code Reader The check starts when the check screen is displayed Read data with the bar code reader in this status e If communication with the bar code reader is normal the read character strings are displayed in hexadecimal text code at Received Data e If nothing is displayed at Received Data when data is read with the bar code reader there is a communication fault check the communication cables and settings 208 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Check Method Check communication with the serial ports by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select I F Check Select Comm Port A or Comm Port B The check screen is displayed Check screen page 207 After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT631 NT631C returns to the I F CHECK MENU screen 209 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Checking Check communication with a printer by following the menu operation from the Communication with a System Menu shown below Printer Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select I F Check Select Printer Confirm that a printer is connected to the NT631 NT631C then press
165. e High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 73 4 1 1 Host Types and Settings The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS 232C ports of both units and the settings to be made at the host are described here When Using the Host Link Method 52 Compatible Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in In the CS1 series or CQM1H PCs the host link method can be used by installing a Serial Communication Board In addition some C200HX HG HE Z E have an integral CPU that can be connected in the host link method by installing a Communication Board Check the model and series of the PC the type of installed Serial Communica tion Board Serial Communication Unit or Host Link Unit before making a con nection The host units that can be connected to the NT631 NT631C by the host link method using the RS 232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host PLC Series CS1 Series Units with Built in Host Link Function CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 EV1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 EV1 CPUs Connectable with Host Link Units or Expansion Com munication Board CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 EV1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 EV1 Host Link Unit Communication Board CS1W SCU21 CS1W SCB21 CS1W SCB41 Section 4 1 Connectable to CS1G CS1H C Series C1000H CPU01 EV1 C2000H CPU01 EV1 C120 LK201 EV1 C1000H C2000H C200HS CP
166. e RUN LED by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below hotest Ee FERUT Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select Device Check e If the RUN LED is functioning normally it will operate as follows At this time the LED Check touch switch will be displayed in reverse video Lit in green OFF litin red OFF lit in green e To end the LED check press the LED Check touch switch on the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen again 197 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Checking the LCD Check if the LCD display or EL display for NT631 functions normally by follow Screen Display ing the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select Device Check Select LCD Check e The check screen displays all the dots on the screen either press anywhere on the touch panel or wait for three seconds and all the dots will be cleared With the NT631C the display and clearance of all the dots on the screen is repeated for each color in turn red green blue magenta cyan yellow white black On completion of the display and clearance of all dots the NT631 NT631C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen e To abort the LCD check press the top right corner of the touch panel The NT631 NT631C will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen 198 System Maintenance Se
167. e data even once initialization will restore the initial values set using the Support Tool The values will not be cleared Initialize the recipe tables by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 1 erag Select Maintenance Mode ST DUE ENL Select Memory Init ETE IHI TEHLE Select Recipe Table EE Select Yes The recipe tables are initialized During ini tialization the message Initializing is dis played 136 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 If No is selected the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the recipe tables On completion of memory table initialization the message Finished is displayed and the NT31 NT31C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables Reference It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string memory tables in the NT631 NT631C When these tables are initialized the values are returned to those set by the Support Tool they are not cleared When the memory tables are initialized they are returned to their initial values regardless of the setting made for the resume function page 170 If ON is set for the Resume Function memory switch the initial values set with the Support Tool will not be recorded in the memory tables unless they are initial ized e If OFF is set for the Resume Function memory switch
168. e figure below For details on system menu operation refer to 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu page 129 This is the mode in which the NT631 NT631C operates In this mode the NT631 NT631C can be controlled from the host and various display and I O operations are i possible Transmit Mode In this mode screen data and other data are transmitted between the Support Tool and the NT631 NT631C When system To change system Maintenance Mode settings and screen settings or screen In this mode data registration have data contents NT631 NT631C maintenance operations such as initialization of the memory checking settings and the I O check are executed been completed To change system settings or screen SYSTEM MENU data contents Quit Power ON _ Transmit Mode _ N Mai tenancs Mode Expansion Mode N Expansion Mode N In this mode the ae Ne oyren N Programming Console program function is used or check settings tor data a the version of system control are changed program System Installer Mode In this mode the system program of the NT631 NT631C is installed display of the System Menu is enabled or disabled and screen data changes are enabled and disabled among other operations Items in the System The items displayed in the system menu and their functions are as follows Men
169. e left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa tion contained in this publication About this Manual This manual describes connecting the NT series NT631 and NT631C Programmable Terminals PTs to a PC Programmable Controller or other host and peripheral devices and the settings required for commu nications and applications It includes the sections described below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install
170. e shielding of the RS 422A cable 5 2 4 1 N Connection among RS 422A Ports The connection method in which the RS 422A ports of multiple NT631 NT631Cs and one host are connected in a 1 N connection is described here CS1G H C200HX HG HE Z E 9 pin connector RS 422A cables E max total length 500 m NT631 NT631C Serial port B RS 422A 485 terminal block Reference Communication using the RS 422A type standard NT Link 1 N method is possible only when a CS1W SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed in a CS1 series CS1G H a Communications Board is installed in a C200HX HG HE Z E or a CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed ina CQM1H e Communication using the RS 422A type high speed NT Link 1 N method is possible only when a CS1W SCB41 Serial Communications Board is installed ina CS1 series CS1G H 116 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting between NT631 NT631C Units NT631 NT631C Host RS 422A RDA NT631 NT631C side NT631 NT631C side A Rao Fo iE RS 422A J L RS 422A Fao oH ASN 485 Tories Ele RDA SDA gt 2 P2O DA on 000 D U gt U gt DE interface sp8 RSAC RSAC oO RSA RSB ni Shielding wire 24V DC tet Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631 NT631C at the
171. e third memory switch setting screen Press Comm Auto return to display the re quired setting The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 12 Setting the Time out Interval The NT631 NT631C goes into the time out error status if no response is re ceived from the host within a fixed time The Time out Interval setting specifies the time lapse at which time out is judged to have occurred The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds The default factory setting is 1 second 174 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Reference Whether or not an error screen is displayed when a time out error occurs is deter mined by the setting for the Comm Auto return memory switch Set the time out interval by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below lora TEN PEL Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select
172. e ultimate system the rear of the NT631 must be placed within an enclosure to restrict the opera tors use only to the front panel When using NT631 ST211 B EV2 warm up time of the power supply must be 200 ms or less If longer than this NT631 may not boot up Ole G Aa 24 VDC Breaker STO so 24 VDC power supply 31 Installation Section 3 1 Power Supply The applicable power supply specifications are as follows Power supply 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 10 fluctuation range Power supply voltage capacity NT631 ST211 B V2 30 W or more Power supply warm up time within 200 ms NT631C ST141 B ST151 B V1 18 W or more Parts Used for Connection Note For the connection to the power supply terminal block twisted wires of 2 mm or greater cross sectional area and M3 5 size crimp terminals must be used Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0 8 N m Fork type Round type 7 mm or less 7 mm or less O Recommended Terminals Maker Type Type Applicable Wire fork type round type stranded wire Japan Solderless Terminal MFG 2 YS3A 2 3 5 Fuji Terminal 2 YAS3 5 V2 S3 5 2 0 to 2 63 mm Nichifu Terminal 2Y 3 5 2 3 5 3 1 4 Grounding The NT631 NT631C has a functional ground terminal Carry out wiring under the following cond
173. e with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 Tool Transmit Error Check Sum Error occurs while downloading by the following case e corrupted data by noise Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 Tool Transmit Error Time out Error occurs while downloading by the following case e faulty connecting cable The connecting cable is defective Check the cable connection and perform a conductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable Tool Transmit Error Reception was failed by Buffer Over Flow Error 228 The receive buffer has overflowed Retransmit the data from the Support Tool Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 7 2 4 Errors in the System Installer Mode and Their Remedies This section describes the errors that may occur in the System Installer mode of the NT631 NT631C and the remedies for these errors Message System Program not exist or incorrect The system program has not been installed The system program has been deleted due to a hardware fault or because the flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life Select Download System Program and download the system program 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program page 140 If this does not solve the problem contact your OMRON service
174. een print function ESC P Tone Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels conforming to ESC P 24 J82 PC PR201H Tone Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels conforming to PC PR201PL PCL 5 Tone Monochrome printing in 8 grayscale levels conforming to PCL 5 However the NT631 supports monochrome printing only Displays the current time in accordance with the built in clock lock functi Calendar and clock function Displayed and set with Calendar Check in the MAINTENANCE MODE menu Executes functions equivalent to those of a C2Q0Q0H PRO27 E Programming Console for CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 EV1 only CQM1H Programming Console function C200HX HG HE Z E and SRM1 C02 V2 only PCs Executes functions as a Programming Console for CS1 series PLC Device Monitor function The Device Monitor function can be used to change the PC s operating mode read change words in the PC s data areas and display the PC s error log Compatible PCs include the CPM1 CPM1A CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E SRM1 and CS1 series PCs Mathematical function Up to 256 calculation expressions can be registered along with the screen data The mathematical function reads the required data from numeral memory tables or host words executes the registered calculations and writes the results Arithmetic operators logic operators bit operators and comparative ope
175. eet for the CS1 series is automatically displayed 215 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 Standard Programming Console Key Sheet lt PROGRAM gt PASSWORD DS MONITOR RUN PROGRAM E 9 EXT CHG SROH 6 FLAY DEL MONTE 3 SET REC reser INS f S B FUN SFTINOT RE HIFT E AND OR CNT ERY Differences with Respect to Programming Consoles 216 Reference e Programs cannot be stored recorded or read replayed If it is necessary to store or read a program use a Programming Device e It is not possible to adjust the volume of the key press sound Whether or not the key press sound sounds is determined by the setting for the Key Press Sound memory switch of the NT631 NT631C It sounds when the setting is ON and does not when the setting is OFF page 160 e If an error occurs when using the Programming Console function an error screen is displayed Whether or not the buzzer sounds at this time is deter mined by the setting for the Buzzer Sound memory switch of the NT631 NT631C page 161 A communications error will occur if you use the Programming Console function to change the communications settings in the PC s PC Setup that govern the port to which the NT631 NT631C is connected In this case the Programming Console function will be unusable Device Monitor Function Section 6 13 6 13 Device Monitor Function N Caution Reference The NT631 NT631C has been e
176. elect Screen Memory Press Execute i jour wauta this check ien the aren data ia eraa e During the check the message Checking Now is displayed e On normal completion of the check the message Memory Check OK is dis played e f an error is discovered in the check the message Memory Check NG is dis played 201 System Maintenance Section 6 14 After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT631 NT631C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen Checking Touch Check whether or not the touch switches function normally by following the Switches menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Emer Meck AT ALE PUG PEA Select I O Check Select Device Check Select Touch Switch D JEH Press the touch switches displayed on the SESEEEEES screen A touch switch is normal if it is dis layed in reverse video while pressed irrin play p EEEE EEEE 4 fH emee EE REEE REEERE Ent EPEE ESERE En sE ENESE Eent EEE EEE EEEE ott i DENTEN EEEEET of fe Hae a E HEE HEE H is 202 System Maintenance Section 6 14 To end the check press the touch switch at the top right corner NT631 dis played in reverse video NT631C displayed in yellow The NT631 NT631C will return to the DEVICE CHECK MENU Reference The functions of touch switches pressed during
177. en data 146 Principal Functions of NT631 NT631C 8 Printer cable 278 Printer connector 28 Programming console function 211 Programming environment 243 Protective sheet 279 PT 273 R Rated power supply voltage 241 Recipe function 6 Recommended printers 34 Relationship between system program and hardware 269 Relationships among modes 127 Replaceable backlight 279 Replacement battery 280 Replacing the backlight 232 Replacing the battery 237 Reset switch 28 Index RS 232C adaptor 276 RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit 84 276 RS 422A adaptor 276 RUN 127 RUN LED 27 S Screen data composition and transmission units 144 Screen data memory check 199 Selecting menu items 130 Serial communication board 52 70 73 96 111 Serial communication unit 52 Serial port A 16 24 Serial port A connector 28 Serial port B 16 24 Serial port B connector 28 Set 150 Setting Screen Saver Movement 165 Setting the automatic reset function 172 Setting the bar code reader input function 177 Setting the Buzzer Sound 161 Setting the communication type for serial port B 157 Setting the conditions for communications with the me mory link method 148 Setting the display language in the System Installer mode 140 Setting the history display method 168 Setting the host link method 150 Setting the Key Press Sound 160 Setting the Memory Link Method 155 Setting
178. end of the RS 422A cable x marked in the above figure using the short circuit tool supplied with the NT631 NT631C In order to avoid an FG ground loop connect the functional ground of only one of the NT631 NT631C units to the shielding of the RS 422A cable Connecting an NT631 NT631C and a Host NT631 NT631C Host RS 422A Wiring When Connecting a CS1 series CS1G H Serial Communication Board C Series C200HX HG HE Z E Communication Board or CQM1H Serial Communications Board Applicable units CS1G CPU42 E V1 CS1G CPU44 E V1 CS1H CPU63 E V1 CS1H CPU64 E V V1 V1 CS1H CPU65 E V CS1H CPU67 E V C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E 117 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 RDA NT631 NT631C side PLC side Abbreviation RDA TRM RS 422A SDA 485 interface RS 422A interface a Next PT I 24v 9 pin type J e AAAA In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 422A cable 5 2 5 1 N Connection among RS 485 Ports The connection method in which the RS 485 ports of multiple NT631 NT631Cs and one host are conne
179. etails on calling the System Installer mode refer to Calling the System In staller Mode page 130 6 5 1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode The first setting made in the System Installer mode is to select whether the dis play language is to be English or Japanese Select English or Japanese From here on this manual assumes that English has been selected here The System Installer mode menu is dis played Exil Syslen Tnslal er If there is no system program or the system iene Scien Baar program has been corrupted the message System Program not exist or incorrect is Change Syoten Settingo displayed at the bottom of the screen Erase Sereen Daza 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program Use this function when the system program of the NT631 NT631C has been cor rupted or when installing a new system program 140 Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 Reference In order to install a system program the system installer must also be installed at the Support Tool The system installer is an accessory with the Support Tool NT ZJCAT1 EV4 When installing the Support Tool in a personal computer install the system installer also For details on the method for installing the sys tem installer at the Support Tool side and the operating procedure refer to the NT series Support Tool Ver 4 1 for Windows Operation Manua
180. etting the Switches on an RS 422A Adapter CPM1 CIF 11 CPM1 Set the terminator selector switch to ON upper position 4a JF 9 00000000 5 O00000000 Sy H Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Board Serial Communications Board with RS 422A 485 port equipped for CS1 series CPU Type CS1W SCB41 The port 2 is RS 422A 485 port Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After the settings are written they become effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or executing the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and the settings are shown 105 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Allocation DM area CH Writing Value Settings Host link mode 2 stop bits data length 7 bits even parity Communication speed 9600 bps Communication speed 19200 bps Transmit delay time 0 ms No CTS control Unit No 0 for host link Using the NT Link 1 1 Method Compatible Host Units Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the RS 422A type NT Link 1 1 function built in e The C200HX HG HE Z E CPUs can be connected by the RS 422A type NT Link 1 1 method by installing a Communications Board e The CQM1H CPUs can be connected by the R
181. f C200HX HG HE Z E Writing Value Settings Host link mode no CTS control Communication conditions set by the contents of DM Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 9600 bps Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps Unit 00 When using a CPM1 Writing Value Settings Host link mode Communication conditions set by the contents of DM Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 9600 bps Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps Unit 00 Connecting to a CPM2C The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS1 series PCs The CPM2C s communication port handles both RS 232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally Therefore when using the CPM2C it is necessary to select RS 232C or peripheral port connections according to the kind of cable and port on the cable used as shown in the fol lowing table Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details Port connecting to PT PC Setup RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CPM2C CN111 Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CPM2C CN111 Peripheral port settings RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CS1W CN118 Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CS1W CN114 Peripheral port settings Peripheral port CPM2C CN111 CPM2C CS1W CN118 CPM2C CS1W CN114
182. f Use The Version Display screen is displayed by operating the system menu as de scribed below Ver 3 10 Select Expansion Mode ai Select Version Display hui The system program s version information will be displayed as described below Press the Quit Hode HIRST HI touch switch to exit the Version Display screen and t man oi return to the Expansion Mode screen ere LE e PT Model PT model number a e System program System program name e Version System program version e Date Date program was created This screen is an example Actual screens will show the information specific to the PT and system program being used After checking the version information press the Quit touch switch to exit the Version Display screen and return to the Expansion Mode screen Reference The PT model always shows the model number of the ivory model of the PT The B suffix will not be displayed even for black models e The system program s version number is also displayed in the upper right cor ner of the System Menu e The creation date does not always match the file date of the system program installed with the System Installer 220 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance This section describes the action to take when NT631 NT631C errors occur and how to carry out maintenance and inspection to prevent the occurrence of errors del Troubleshooting wats tage he Bete 4
183. f the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to NT631 NT631C SW2 4 ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously OFF System Screen not transmitted simultaneously SW2 3 ON Bank 1 OFF Bank 0 SW1 4 ON System program OFF Screen data It is not strictly necessary to set SW2 1 to OFF to disable writing to the PT but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors Reference Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously disables the setting of SW1 4 e Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously disables the setting of SW2 3 writes the system program into bank 0 and the screen data into bank 1 at all times 39 Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 2 Switch the NT631 NT631C power ON The screen data is automatically written into the memory unit The screen data in the NT631 NT631C is preserved The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing At the same time the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the means of the number of bytes and blocks 1 bank 16 block 1024k byte RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status Preparing flashes at intervals of 1 second Transmitting flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Verifying flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Finished lights up 3 S
184. from screen number 0 Setting the screen number to 0 turns the screen off The system startup waiting time has not elapsed yet This is not an error The display will appear after the waiting time has elapsed Cannot communicate with the Support Tool The Transmit mode has not been established Display the System Menu and select the Transmit mode 6 6 Transmitting the Screen Data page 144 Not connected to the Support Tool Check the installation of the connector cable 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool page 33 The PT model setting and direct connection setting at the Support Tool do not match the NT631 NT631C Using the PT Configuration settings of the Support Tool set the PT model and direct connection settings that match the NT631 NT631C Cannot communicate with the host Cannot switch from the system initializing screen Communication error message is displayed when communicating to the host Memory switch settings do not match Check the communication setting in the Memory Switch menu of the Maintenance mode and match the communication protocol settings for the host and NT631 NT631C 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches page 147 NT631 NT631C and host are not correctly connected Check that the type length and installation of the connector cable match the specifications Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port an
185. function which records the time at which screens are displayed during operation and the number of times they are displayed and the alarm history record function which continual 168 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Reference ly monitors bit statuses at the host and records the time when bits come ON and the number of times they come ON The Hist Disp Method setting determines whether when these record data are displayed in sort by occurrence the records are displayed in a progression from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest e From Old Data The records are displayed in sequence from the oldest to newest e From New Data The records are displayed in sequence from the newest to oldest The default factory setting is From New Data e When the voltage of the NT631 NT631C s built in battery becomes low the history record contents cannot be retained e For details on the display history record function and the alarm history record function refer to 2 15 1 Display History Record Function and 2 15 2 Alarm History Record Function in the Reference Manual 169 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Set the history display method by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch a Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the second memory switch setting screen 4
186. g change from OFF to ON e Screen display change from OFF to ON e The time before the screen is turned OFF is set by the Screen Saver Start up Time setting For details refer to 6 9 8 Setting the Screen Saver Start up Time page 166 e Even if its operation has been set with the Screen Saver Movement setting the screen saver function will not be executed if 000 is set for Screen Saver Start up Time e Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT631 NT631C In System Menu or System Installer mode this function is not started 165 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Set the screen saver operation by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the second memory switch setting screen Press Screen Saver Movement to display Display or Display erased The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the A
187. g data Maximum of 1000 Maximum of 2000 Character string data Maximum of 1000 Maximum of 2000 Bit data 256 Maximum of 1000 Mathematical tables None 256 max Calculations can be executed automatically in the PT Image data Maximum of 224 Maximum of 4095 3 Library data Maximum of 896 Maximum of 12288 3 Method for storing numeric values numeral memory data and PT sta tus control area Fixed as BCD binary coded decimal Selectable from BCD binary coded decimal or binary PT status control area size 4 words 5 words partial change of contents 3 PT status notify area size 3 words 2 words partial change of contents Window control area size None 9 CH 4 Registering continuous screen Possible Not possible Use a screen switchover as a substitute Lamp Touch switch labels Fixed display 1 line only Multiple lines can be displayed ON OFF switching is possible Numeral display is possible Character string display is possible Interlock function Operations can be disabled from the PC by allocating interlock bits to the corresponding touch switch numeral input or character string input Device monitor function Not possible Possible Recipe function None Possible Accessible CS1 PC data areas 1 These functions are available only in V2 versions of the NT631
188. g enabling Writing to The Screen Data Memory When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by this setting it is impossi ble to use the following System Menu functions e Switching to the Transmit mode e Displaying the memory switch setting screens e Checking the screen data memory e Displaying the initialization menu e Displaying the calendar time setting screen the calendar time display screen can be displayed Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 Change the system settings by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below Select Change System Settings Exil Syslen Taslal er Cewnload Sueten Program Change Soten Settings Erase Sereen Daza n Installer ver 1M Select Display System Menu or Screen ok Charce System Sec me Memory Protect Each time either of these items is selected ance the setting switches from Disabled to En Diep la Setan Menu Diab led abled or vice versa Sereen Memory Peotecs Disak led m installer ver IHA Select OK Charge Systan Sev ne Ok The settings are written to the NT631 NT631C while the screen is dis Cance played Displa Syetan Manu isak led Sereen Memory Peotecs Disakled e f Cancel is selected the NT631 NT631C returns to the System Installer mode menu without changing the settings The settings remain as they were before the operatio
189. g the NT link method use an NT link connection there is no mode change with the NT link method Troubleshooting Section 7 1 NT631 NT631C Symptoms Cause Remedy The graph display does not change One of the percentage display settings 100 0 or 100 is incorrect Set the 100 0 and 100 values in the following relationship 100 value lt 0 value lt 100 value The trend graph display does not agree with the actual time axis The cycle for graph display update processing is longer than the set sampling cycle Delete other elements on the same screen as the trend graph that are allocated to the host and have a high update frequency Or lengthen the sampling cycle The Programming Console function cannot be used The communication settings are incorrect Set the communication method as follows when using the Programming Console function e With C series PLC 1 1 NT Link e With CS1 series PLC 1 N NT Link standard or high speed A Programming Console is connected It is not possible to use a Programming Console and the Programming Console function at the same time Disconnect the Programming Console The PC does not support the Programming Console function Not all PCs support the Programming Console function Check the model of PC you are using 6 12 Programming Console Function page 211 The system program for other vendor s PCs has been
190. g to the communication method 187 System Maintenance Section 66 14 Display Method Display the PT setting statuses by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select PT Settings i tjt bi Switch the screen as required by pressing the J next screen or previous screen Bereen Date Ter a PT Control drea E1 omp touch switch tif icat bon Area 1 GBR E 1 0 Winde Contes Area E _ ORR E LJ flureric E no Bina hawt ii Ey aT parat ir EPI SEL TIME FJ Ei tjt bi Press Quit Peran Data Ter PROH The NT631 NT631C returns to the MAINTE PT Coniral Arei E100 1 0 NANCE MODE MENU screen tif icat bon Area Ej GBR E 10000 Kirdi Control Area EGR EL a fie F n Pin 6 11 4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record The display history record function is a function that records the order of display of each screen during operation and the number of times each screen is dis played Only the screens for which the display history screen attribute has been set in advance are processed by this function The record data can be displayed and printed out at a printer connected to the NT631 NT631C by operation from the System Menu This section explains how to display and print out the display history record data recorded in the NT631 NT631C Note that there are two display methods sort by occurrence display time order
191. gh speed 1 N NT Link CPU Units with Built in CPUs Connectable only through a NT Link Function Serial Communication Board or Unit CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 EV1 1 CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 2 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 EV1 C1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 2 1 The high speed 1 N NT Link is not supported in a direct connection to the CPU Unit of a CS1 series PC without the V1 suffix 2 ACS1W SCB21 or CS1W SCB41 Serial Communication Board or CS1W SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required Settings at the Host The Settings required for each Unit are described below e Connecting CS1 series CPU Units CS1 series CPU type CS1G H CPU EV1 PC Setup When connecting to a CS1 series CPU set the following communication condi 73 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Reference Peripheral port This is used mainly for connection to the Programming Device This also supports tions for the PC Setup area in accordance with the communication port to be used When using the built in RS 232C port of CS1G H Writing Value 8200 000A Settings NT link 1 N mode Communications baud rate high speed The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 000 CS1G H Writing Value 8200 000A Settings NT link 1 N mode Communications baud rate high speed The largest model number of the
192. ght does not go off e For details on the screen saver function refer to 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement page 165 e Screen saver function is enabled only through RUN mode of NT631 NT631C In System Menu or System Installer mode this function is not started 167 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Set the screen saver start up time by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press J next screen or 1 previous 1 screen to display the second memory switch setting screen Set a time in the input field to the right of Screen Saver Start up Time Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated and keys To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 9 Setting the History Display Method The NT631 NT631C features the display history record
193. gramming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After settings are written they become effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or executing the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown Allocation DM area CH Writing Value Settings 8200 NT Link 1 N mode 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate standard 000 The largest model number of the con nected PT 0 7 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex For example when connecting PTs with model numbers 3 4 5 and 6 to port 2 in the NT Link 1 N set a value of 8200 Hex for D32010 0000 Hex for DM32011 and 0006 Hex for D32016 Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method 110 Compatible Host Units Only OMRON s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the high speed 1 N NT Link through RS 422A RS 485 The high speed 1 N NT Link must be established through a CS1W SCB41 E Serial Communications Board If a Serial Commu nications Board is used even CS1 series Units without the V1 suffix can be connected via high speed 1 N NT Link Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Board Unit before trying to establ
194. h Set this to RS 422A Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 7 Set SW1 1 to SW1 7 to OFF 0 Dr w a gt n i Synchronization selector switch Set this to Internal Communications speed DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 0010 to select 19 200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON Terminator setting selector switch Set this switch to ON C200H C1000H C2000H CPU mounting type 3G2A6 LK202 EV1 Setting the Rear Switches PERHERE Gooooodd Wena 100 sw3 4 Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 5 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Parity is fixed at Even Parity Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits Communications speed DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled Terminator setting DIP SW3 1 to SW3 6 Set S
195. h Units The connection method in which the RS 485 ports of an NT631 NT631C and a host are connected is described here NT631 NT631C CS1G H C200HX HG HE Z E Serial port B i RS 422A 485 terminal block pin connector RS 485 cable with connectors max length 500 m Reference When RS 485 is used at the PT side only the NT Link 1 N method standard or high speed can be used Connecting an NT631 NT631C and Host NT631 NT631C Host RS 485 t Wiring When Connecting a CS1 series CS1G H Serial Communications Board and C Series C200HX HG HE Z E Communications Board or CQM1H Serial Communications Board Applicable units CS1G CPU42 EV1 CS1G CPU44 EV1 CS1H CPU63 EV1 CS1H CPU65 EV1 CS1H CPU67 EV1 C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E CS1G CPU43 EV1 CS1G CPU45 EV1 CS1H CPU64 EV1 CS1H CPU66 EV1 C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HX CPU44 Z E 115 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 RDA NT631 NT631C side PLC side TRM RS 422A interface _ RS 422A F interface QALA I 24v 9 pin type lt I DC In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to th
196. has been installed and turn the power to the NT631 NT631C ON 2 Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the Support Tool 145 Transmitting the Screen Data Section 6 6 Precautions to Be Observed When Transmitting Screen Data 146 3 Establish the Transmit mode by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below at the NT631 NT631C Ver 3 10 Select Transmit Mode 4 Open the screen data to be transmitted at the Support Tool then select Download NTST PT in the Support Tool s Connect menu and specify the data to be transmitted 5 During screen data transmission the transmission status is displayed 6 On completion of screen data transmission press the Quit touch switch The NT631 NT631C returns to the Transmit mode If the screen data cannot be successfully transmitted from the Support Tool use the communication check functions of the NT631 NT631C to check if commu nication between the NT631 NT631C is normal or not page 205 If any of the following or a system error occurs during transmission of screen data the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly in the NT631 NT631C If this happens the NT631 NT631C may not enter the RUN mode when started up or there may be unpredictable malfunctions such as fail ure to display screens during operation In this case the screen data must be retransmitted in file units to register it correctly
197. hat the power supply to the bar code reader and the power supply to the PT are both OFF before connecting or disconnecting the cable 3 4 1 Connection Method 34 Connect the bar code reader to serial port A of the NT631 NT631C as shown in the figure below NT631 NT631C Bar code reader 9 pin connector Serial port A 7 RS 232C 9 pin Connector cable Bar code reader cable Bar code reader must match the communication setting 3 4 2 Setting a Bar Code Reader page 35 and data format 3 4 3 Data Format page 36 in order to connect to the NT631 NT631C Please confirm the specification of the bar code reader before using Connecting a Bar Code Reader Section 3 4 For details on making a connector cable refer to Appendix G Making the Cable for Connection to a Bar Code Reader page 265 Reference The bar code reader must be connected to serial port A This means that it cannot be connected at the same time as the Support Tool Note also that when a bar code reader is used the host must be connected at serial port B 3 4 2 Setting a Bar Code Reader After connecting a bar code reader set the communication conditions and other settings for it by selection from the system menu At the NT631 NT631C set the communication conditions for communication with the bar code reader by using the memory switches selecting from the op tions indicated in the table below For more detailed information on the
198. he NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without clearing the screen data e If screen data clearance fails a screen asking if you wish to try again is dis played On completion of screen data clearance the NT631 NT631C returns to the Sys tem Installer mode menu screen After the screen data has been cleared if an attempt is made to set the NT631 NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from the Support Tool or memory unit an error message will be displayed and the RUN mode will not be established 6 6 Transmitting the Screen Data Reference Screen Data Composition and Transmission Units 144 The screen data is created with the Support Tool and then transmitted to the NT631 NT631C This section explains how to transmit the screen data For details on how to create the screen data and the operation of the Support Tool refer to the Reference Manual and the NT series Support Tool Ver 4 1 for Windows Operation Manual V061 E1 L e The screen data can be transmitted also from the memory unit installed in the NT631 NT631C For details on this method refer to 3 5 Using a Memory Unit NT631 NT631C with V_ page 36 or 3 6 Using Memory Unit NT631 NT631C without VLI Page 44 e The screen data can be transmitted at a faster rate by setting High for Baud Rate on the Comms Setting window of the Support Tool e f writing to the screen data memory is disabled by
199. he Programming Console function the NT631 NT631C can be used as a Programming Console e If the PC supports the Device Monitor function the NT631 NT631C can be used to change the PC s operating mode and read change data in the PC s memory areas The NT link is compatible with the host link The NT631 NT631C screen data and PC programs used with the host link direct connection method can be used with the NT link method as they are 1 4 4 Connecting to Other Companies PCs 18 Installing a system program for multi venders by using a specific system installer enables the NT631 NT631C to be connected to the PCs of other models in direct Communications Using Memory Links Section 1 5 Compatible PC connection This system installer is supplied with the Support Tool NT ZJCAT1 EV4 The NT631 NT631C can be connected to the following model PCs e Mitsubishi A series programmable controller computer link module e Mitsubishi FX series programmable controller e SLC 500 Series by Allen Bradley e 90 20 and 90 30 Series by GE Fanuc e S7 300 and S7 400 Series by Siemens For details on the procedure for connecting to other model PCs refer to the PC Connection Manual or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links 1 5 1 Memory Link In this section a communication method other than the direct connection called the memory link is discussed Memory link
200. he System Menu if the voltage is low replace the battery with a new one Checking the Battery Voltage page 204 and 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery page 237 If the battery voltage is confirmed to be normal set the calendar clock correctly from the System Menu 6 11 2 Displaying Setting the Calendar and Clock page 185 Backup Data Error Memory table and History data was initialized by backup failure It can be caused by lowered voltage of the battery Initialization has been executed because of an error in the backup data area Check the battery voltage by checking the color of the RUN LED and with the battery check in the System Menu if the voltage is low replace the battery with a new one Checking the Battery Voltage page 204 and 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery page 237 The re transmit the memory table data from the Support Tool If the voltage is normal and the problem recurs contact your OMRON service center With memory switch setting screen Invalid Comm Method 226 Protocol settings for serial port A and serial port B are mismatched Refer to Possible Combinations of Communication Method Settings in page 148 and set the protocol of serial port A and serial port B so that their settings are matched Set serial port A to None when connecting the Support Tool and the host at the same time Section 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 7 2 2 Errors Occurring during O
201. he adjustment while actual ly checking the contrast on the screen Once the contrast has been set it re mains in effect even if the power is turned OFF or the NT631 NT631C is reset and even if the voltage of the built in battery becomes low 181 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Setting from the System Menu Adjust the contrast of the display panel by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Settings Select Contrast Adjust Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in the left half of the screen 2 Increase 10 steps A Increase 1 step V Decrease 1 step Decrease 10 steps f Press Quit The contrast is set and the NT631 NT631C returns to the I O SETTINGS MENU screen 182 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Backlight Brightness Adjustment for NT631C ST141 EV only Reference Setting Using Brightness and Contrast Adjustment Screen Display screen number 9030 using either a touch switch with switch screen func tion or by specifying the display screen in the PT status control area Bei ek HEE 4 lt gt gt gt Adjust the contrast with the touch switches in Bei el H T b M the right half of the screen 2 Increase 10 steps A Increase 1 step V Decrease 1 step y
202. he following combinations data can be stored backed up to a memory unit e Screen data for two PTs e System program for two PTs e System program and screen data for one PT Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 Note Reference One memory unit can store the screen data for two PTs 1 Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or dis connecting a memory unit After mounting a memory unit be sure to tighten its two screws 2 During data transmission do not turn off the power supply to the NT631 NT631C or reset it 3 Do not touch the PCB printed circuit board with bare hands e When a memory unit is mounted the NT631 NT631C cannot be set to the op erating status On completion of data transmission with a memory unit always disconnect the memory unit from the NT631 NT631C before starting NT631 NT631C operation Memory units NT MF261 can be used in common for the following PT mod els NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with and without VLI One memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models However since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31 NT31C and NT631 NT631C an error may occur if an attempt is made to read NT631C data with an NT31C The data must be converted using the Support Tool Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and NT31C and between the NT631 and NT631C the display may not be c
203. he screen data in the NT631 NT631C is displayed here Current Memory Unit Screen Data The comments for the screen data in each area are displayed here Pressing the Trans Direction Change and Bank Change touch switches chan ges the selections for the direction of transmission and the area of the memory unit used 3 Press Execute The data is transmitted The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played in accordance with the progress of data transmission Using a Memory Unit Versions without the Vj Suffix Section 3 6 4 Switch the NT631 NT631C power OFF remove the memory unit then switch the NT631 NT631C power back ON Errors When Using a If an error occurs when using the memory unit the NT631 NT631C operates as Memory Unit follows e The details of the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen e The continuous buzzer sounds e The RUN LED flashes If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission it is pos sible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the OK touch switch but in the case of other errors the status described above re mains in effect until the NT631 NT631C power is turned OFF or reset When an error occurs take remedial action by referring to the table below Mode setting error Probable Cause DIP switches SW1 1 to SW1 3 are all OFF or more than one is ON Remedial Action Turn the NT631 NT631
204. head 0 C a m HA O e OCU COUN DUR Transport Adv Electro Corr yte Wash prv luid Int stop Rev Role and Operation of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 1 1 1 2 Operations of the NT631 NT631C Displays Screens Receives Data from a Host Sends Data to a Host Screen Data The information to be displayed screen data can be created on a computer us ing the Support Tool and stored in the NT631 NT631C The screen data can be displayed on the NT631 NT631C in response to instructions from the host or touch switch operation The screen data designated by instructions from the host or touch switch operation is displayed The NT631 NT631C can be connected to the host by a host link or NT link and receive necessary data from the host Data input using the touch panel switch ON OFF statuses numeric values character strings can be transmitted to the host oe as ON OFF information numeric data etc Touch panel The screen data to be displayed on the NT631 NT631C can be created on a per sonal computer using the Support Tool Connect the NT631 NT631C to the per sonal computer with an RS 232C cable and transmit the screen data to the NT631 NT631C Create screen data RS 232C Personal computer Support Tool Screen data Q When the host is connected at serial port A the pers
205. hen the Programming Console function is started the PC operation status is read and reflected at the PC The mode lock key element is also a touch switch and it alternates between the lock ON with no key displayed and lock OFF with key displayed states when pressed During the lock ON state mode selection key operations are ineffec tive The mode displays change as indicated in the figures below during the lock ON status and during the lock OFF status When the Programming Console function starts the lock ON status is estab lished If the RUN MONITOR or PROGRAM mode selection key is pressed in the lock OFF status the mode changes and the lock ON status is established During Lock OFF RUN mode MONITOR mode PROGRAM mode MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR PRUGRAM RUN PROGRAM RUN Mes X During Lock ON RUN mode MONITOR mode PROGRAM mode MONITOR Programming Console Keyboard The Programming Console keyboard used on the screen when the Program ming Console function is used is comprised entirely of touch switches shown by the dashed line frames in the figure below On pressing a touch switch a key operation is executed However since there is a discrepancy between the size of the displayed keys and the size of the touch switches take care to press as close to the center of the key as possible by referring to the figure below In addition if the connected host is the CS1G CS1H the Programming Console key sh
206. hin 5 days e When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery e When the RUN LED is lit in orange during operation or in red when stopped e When the message The voltage is lowered is displayed on switching on the power or resetting the NT631 NT631C e When The voltage is lowered is displayed in the Battery check in the battery check menu of the Maintenance mode Battery Replacement Method Replace the battery by following the procedure given below To protect the contents of the memory the battery must be replaced within 5 min utes 1 Keep the power ON for at least 5 minutes and then turn it OFF Unless the power is kept ON for at least 5 minutes the memory contents cannot be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery 2 Insert a flat blade screwdriver at the top of the battery cover located at the left of the rear face of the NT631 NT631C and pull it toward you 237 Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 3 Remove the battery that is secured under the battery cover grip the cable and pull the connector straight out 4 Insert the connector of the new battery into the connector on the NT631 NT631C and fit the battery under the battery cover When inserting the battery connector make sure that the projection on it faces to the left and press it fully home while keeping it straight The connector of the new battery must be connected within 5 minutes after disconnec
207. hines and monitoring the production line Host Link CS1 series C series CVM1 CV series PC SRM1 Can be connected to CPU units host link units and SRM1 However connection is not possible to some models of CPU unit and SRM1 pages 52 and 96 NT link CS1G CS1H CPM1 CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CVM1 CV series PCs SRM1 Can be connected to CPU units and SRM1 However connection is not possible to some models pages 65 69 106 max 15 m or gnd 108 RS 422A 485 cable Memory link Can be connected to a personal computer FA computer etc max 500 m Other companies PCs can also be connected Personal computer Running Windows 95 98 NT ee pee Support Tool Used to create screens for the NT631 NT631C at the personal lt computer and transmit them to the NT631 NT631C and to make NT631 NT631C settings z System installer EES Used to change the system H EE program of the NT631 NT631C NT631 NT631C Displays production line monitoring and instructions to the operation site and notifies the switch ON OFF status and numeric value inputs to the host When a 1 N NT Link is being used up to 8 PTs can be connected to a single PC e Bar code reader page 34 e Recommended printers page 33 It is also possible to use printers that can emulate an NEC PC PR201H us ing the NEC PC PR201PL control protocol and printers that comply with one of the following EPSO
208. hod Connect the printer to the NT631 NT631C with a Centronics cable as shown below The length of the cable should not exceed 1 5 m 33 Connecting a Bar Code Reader Section 3 4 Reference If the connector cable is connected or disconnected while the power to the printer is on the NT631 NT631C may malfunction Always turn off the power to the print er before connecting or disconnecting the cable Recommended Connector Cable The following connection cables are recommended NT CNT121 1 5 m 20 pin to 36 pin made by OMRON Recommended Printers When using a printer use one that can emulate an NEC PC PR201H using the NEC PC PR201PL control protocol or complies with one of the follow ing EPSON control standards ESC P 24 J83C color or ESC P 24 J82 monochrome When using a monochrome printer with an NT631C set Tone printing with the NT631C memory switches page 164 3 4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader Note Connecting a bar code reader to the NT631 NT631C enables bar code data to read as character strings into character string input fields and set in character string memory tables In order to use a bar code reader the Comm A Method memory switch must be set to Bar Code Reader For details on the method for inputting character strings with a bar code reader refer to 3 7 Input of Numeric values and Character Strings in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual Make sure t
209. ibed below ree Select Expansion Mode Select Programming Console The Programming Console screen is dis played Press the Programming Console sheet keys touch switches for the operation Press the Quit touch switch to exit the screen An error is displayed if a wrong communica tion protocol is selected or a Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port 1 1 With the CS1G CS1H the Programming Console function can be used simultaneously at both the built in RS 232C port and peripheral port Reference When an error screen is displayed press the Check touch switch on the screen to return to the system menu In addition pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously in the error screen enables the display of the system menu Key Operations Mode Selection Keys Mode Lock Key The display element on the Programming Console screen shown below com 214 Programming Console Function Section 6 12 prises the mode selection keys which change the operation mode of the PC and the mode lock key which prevents unintended mode changes MONT TOR RALE PROGRAM Mode selection keys Mode lock key The RUN MONITOR and PROGRAM mode selection key elements are touch switches and pressing them causes the PC operation mode to change unlike an actual Programming Console it is possible to switch directly between the RUN mode and the PROGRAM mode W
210. id otcne obey Litho inhi Goethe ancteh oS 128 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu 00000 129 6 4 Memory Initialization 00 eee ee eee 131 6 4 1 Clearing Screen Data 2 eee eee 131 6 4 2 Initializing Display History Record Data 133 6 4 3 Initializing Alarm History Record Data 134 6 4 4 Initializing the Recipe Tables 0 00 00 000000000 136 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables 0 000000 0000 137 6 4 6 Initializing the Memory Switches 0 0 0 0 00000 138 6 5 Operations in the System Installer Mode 0 00 00 00000 140 6 5 1 Setting the Display Language in the System Installer Mode 140 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program 005 140 6 5 3 Changing the System Settings 000000000000 142 6 5 4 Clearing Screen Data 2 eee eee 143 6 6 Transmitting the Screen Data 0 00 ee eee 144 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches 147 6 7 1 About Communication Conditions 0 0 0 0 2000 147 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method 000 150 6 7 3 Setting the NT Link 1 1 Method 00 152 6 7 4 Setting the NT Link 1 N Method Standard High speed 152 6 7 5 Setting the Memory Link Method 00 155 6 7 6 Setting the
211. ided Adjustable in 3 levels by at the touch panel Not provided Automatic turn off function Can be set to turn off in 1 to 255 minutes or to remain on Indicators POWER green LED Lit while power is being supplied Lit in green Running normally Memory unit automatic transmission done Flash in green Memory unit automatic transmission being executed memory unit automatic transmission error Lit in orange Low battery voltage during operation Flash in red Low battery voltage when NT631 NT631C is stopped 1 Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at normal temperature and humidity 2 Sharp brightness adjustment is not available 242 Specifications Appendix A Panel Specifications Specification Type Resistive type Number of switches 768 32 horizontally 24 vertically Maximum number that can be registered on one screen 256 Cell size NT631 ST2110 EV2 59 59mm Touch panel NT631 ST1410 EV2 65 65mm NT631 ST1510 EV2 5 9 5 9mm Input Pressure sensitive type Operating force 1N minimum Life expectancy One million operations minimum External Interface Specifications Item Specification Conforms to EIA RS 232C Serial port A D SUB 9 pin connector female 5 V 250 mA max output at pin No 6 nae Serial port B EIA RS 232C Serial port B terminal block selectable by memory switch Serial communication Serial
212. ies Serial Communications Board Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS 232C port for CS1 series CPU Units CS1W SCB41 21 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Reference Reference Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num ber 991220 12 20 99 and later support the high speed 1 N NT Link Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used CPU Allocation DM Area Settings Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or execution of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown Allocation DM area CH writing Port 1 Port 2 Value DM32000 DM32010 8200 NT link 1 N mode DM32011 Communications baud rate high speed Settings The largest model number of the OMiseel6 connected PT 0 7 For example when connecting PTs with model numbers 3 4 5 and 6 to port 1 set the value 8200 Hex to DM32000 000A Hex to DM32001 and 0006 Hex to DM32006 Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Unit A CS1 series Backplane mounted type CS1W SCU21 Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communicatio
213. ifications Performance Specifications Display Specifications Display panel Display device Specification Appendix A NT631 ST211 EL monochrome NT631C ST141 J EV2 Color STN LCD with backlight NT631C ST151 Color TFT LCD with backlight Number of dots resolution 640 dots horizontally 480 dots vertically Size of a standard character Height 5 28 mm Width 2 64 mm Height 5 76 mm Width 2 88 mm Height 5 28 mm Width 2 64 mm Effective display area 211 mm horizontally 158 mm vertically 10 4 inches 229 mm horizontally 172 mm vertically 11 3 inches 211 mm horizontally 158 mm vertically 10 4 inches View angle No restriction 30 55 45 Up down Left Right Up 40 Down 55 Left 55 Right 55 Display color Black white 2 colors 8 colors and intermediate colors can be displayed with tiling patterns Life expectancy 30 000 hours minimum until brightness reduced by 30 50 000 hours minimum until brightness reduced by half Contrast adjustment Not provided Adjustable in 100 levels by operation at the touch panel Not provided Backlight white cold cathode tube Life expectancy at high brightness 25 000 hours minimum 30 000 hours minimum Replacement Can be replaced from the rear Brightness adjustment Not prov
214. in the event of operating errors Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 Reference Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously disables the setting of SW1 4 e Setting SW2 4 to ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously disables the setting of SW2 3 In this case the data transmission becomes possible only if the data inside memory unit is in either of following combinations Bank 0 system program Bank 1 other than system program Bank 0 other than system program Bank 1 system program If the combination is not as listed above a data transmitting error occurs e When writing the system program into the NT631 NT631C the type of system program inside memory unit and the type of PT unit must be corresponding 2 Switch the NT631 NT631C power ON The screen data is automatically written into the PT The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing At the same time the progress of data writing status is displayed by the means of the number of bytes and blocks 1 bank 16 block 1024k byte The RUN LED operates as follows according to the processing status Preparing flashes at intervals of 1 second Transmitting flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Verifying flashes at intervals of 0 5 second Finished lights up 3 Switch the NT631 NT631C power OFF remove the memory unit To operate NT631
215. ing Status 0 0 187 6 11 4 Displaying and Printing the Display History Record 188 6 11 5 Displaying and Printing the Alarm History Record 190 6 11 6 Checking Screen Data 00 00 00 cee eee eee 192 6 11 7 Device Check ices ics Sette eee ee a See ee A 195 6 11 8 Checking Interfaces 0 eee eee eee 205 6 12 Programming Console Function 0 0 0 c cee eee eee 211 6 12 1 Usable Systems 0 eee eee 212 6 12 2 Connection Method 0 0 00 eee eee 213 6 123 Method of Use 0 eee ene 214 6 13 Device Monitor Function 0 0 0 2 ce eee 217 6 13 1 Compatible Systems 00 00 218 6 13 2 Connection Method 00 02 218 6213 3 Methodof Use 4 on a sane ecu Ned Sea Ea HOE A eis 219 6 14 Version Display sirere beeni eedi eet eee eee potas ert ON 219 6 14 1 Method of Use secos peonon ie pad ete a ede 220 124 System Menu Operation Flow Section 6 1 6 1 System Menu Operation Flow Create the Screen Data Start Up the NT631 NT631C Display the System Menu page 126 Initialize the Memory page 131 Transmit the Screen Data page 144 Set the Memory Switches pages 147 158 177 Start Operation page 158 System Maintenance page 181 Follow the procedure below when using the NT631 NT631C for the first time or changing the system program Create the data to be displaye
216. ing used the NT631 NT631C can be switched to Transmit mode from the host even if the NT631 NT631C is operating and screen data can be written The NT631 NT631C can be returned to RUN mode after the screen data is written The memory link online transfer function can be used to replace screen data at a fixed time each day or replace screen data with maintenance screen data for maintenance For more details on the memory link online transfer function refer to information on the memory link online transfer function in the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual Before Operating Section 1 6 1 6 Before Operating Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT631 NT631C NT631 NT631C Support Tool Set the host settings Install the PT in the Install the Support operation panel Tool at the computer e For the host link refer to pages 52 and 96 and page 30 Refer to the manual the manuals for the host y for the Support Tool link unit and Program Connect the power supply ming Devices page 31 e For the NT link 1 1 re v fer to pages 65 and 106 Install the system program e For the NT link 1 N re refer to page 140 and the fer to pages 69 and 108 Support Tool manual e For the high speed NT v v T nii to pages Make the settings in the Create the screens i 2 system installer
217. ink NT20S NT31 NT31C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C up to 8 PTs can be connected to one port of the PC and used at the same time Up to 8 PTs NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C can also be connected simultaneously when the high speed 1 N NT Link is being used All of the PTs connected to a PC port must use either the standard or high speed 1 N NT Link the two communications systems cannot share a single port e When using a C200HX HG HE Z E PC and standard 1 N NT Links up to three 1 N NT Link systems i e 24 PTs can be connected by installing a com munication board in the option slot of the CPU Only the standard 1 N NT Link can be used For details on the Communications Board refer to the SYSMAC Communications Board Operation Manual W304 E1 L e When using a CQM1H PC and standard 1 N NT Links multiple 1 N NT Link systems can be connected by installing Serial Communications Boards in the Inner Board slots For details on the Serial Communications Board refer to the CQM1H Serial Communications Board Operation Manual W365 E1 L e When using CS1G H by installing a communication board in the INNER board slot of the CPU or installing a serial communication unit in the base unit multi ple 1 N NT Link systems standard or high speed can be connected For de tails on the communication board communication unit refer to the CS1 series Serial Communications Board Unit Operation Manual W336 E1 L e If the PC supports t
218. inspection e Screwdrivers Philips flat head e Tester or digital voltmeter e Industrial alcohol e 100 cotton cloth e Hygrometer required in some cases Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 e Thermometer required in some cases e Synchroscope required in some cases e Pen writing oscilloscope required in some cases Points Inspected Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the stated criteria If there is either improve the surrounding environment so that the values fall within the stated range or adjust the NT631 NT631C for example by re tightening screws Point Inspected Power supply Fluctuation in power supply terminal Permissible voltage fluctuation range Tester voltage voltage 24 VDC 15 to 10 Ambient Ambient temperature temperature in the 0 to 50 C Thermometer environmental operation panel conditions Ambient humidity humidity in the 35 to 85 RH Hygrometer operation panel Presence absence of dust Dust must not be settled Visual inspection Inspection Inspection Details Criterion Instrument Mounting Looseness of mounting brackets etc To be no looseness Philips screwdriver conditions Connector connections of connecting To be fully inserted and locked with Philips screwdriver cable no looseness Looseness of screws in external wiring To be no looseness Philips screwdriver Conditions of external connecting cables F
219. installed PC models other than OMRON The Programming Console function can be used only when the system program for OMRON PCs is installed Install the correct system program The Device Monitor function cannot be used The communications settings are not correct Set the communication method as follows when using the Device Monitor function e With C series PLCs 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link e With CS1 series PLCs 1 N NT Link standard or high speed The PC does not support the Device Monitor function Not all PCs support the Device Monitor function Check the model of PC you are using Refer to 6 13 Device Monitor Function for details The system program installed in the PT is for a PC maker other than OMRON The Device Monitor function can be used only when the PT is connected to a PT with the system program for OMRON PCs installed Install a system program that supports the Device Monitor function The memory table display contents differ from the initial value set at the Support Tool Since the memory table is allocated to the host memory the display is updated in accordance with the contents of the host memory When the contents of the memory table are set as a fixed value do not allocate the memory table to the host The battery voltage has dropped and the data in the memory table has been destroyed Replace the battery and execute memory table initialization 7 3 1 Replacing the Ba
220. ion Short circuit tool Shiel RS 422A 485 interface RSB lt J DC PLC side RS 422A 9 pin type In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 422A cable Wiring When Connecting a CVM1 CV series CPU Applicable units CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV CVM1 CV series CPUs whose model names do not have the suffix EV CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU11 EV not be connected by any connection method RDA NT631 NT631C side RS 422A 485 interface 2 2 2H DA D OG D U gt DF DE 24V DC AAAA Ref a PLC side RS 422A 9 pin type oa can In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 422A cable Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Wiring for a Memory Link Connection Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram RDA NT631 NT631C side Host side TRM RDB so sree SDB interface RSA RSB A OJ lt zv Ol lt c In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 422A cable 5 2 3 Direct Connection between RS 485 Ports at Bot
221. is connected to the peripheral port PRO COMENTE SW1 OFF SW2 ON Sw Swe e Connecting PT to built in RS 232C port A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port PRO ete SW1 OFF ce SW2 OFF Swi SWZ Setting the Switches on a RS 232C Adapter When using a CPM1 CIF01 RS 232C Adapter set the mode switch as shown in the following diagram 2 O O O 00000000 Set the mode setting switch to HOST upper position CS1 series CPU type CS1G H CPU EV1 Connect to the built in RS 232C port of the CPU or the RS 232C port of the communication board Note that the connection to a peripheral port must be made via an RS 232C adapter CS1W CN118 specially designed for connect ing to a peripheral port PC Setup When connecting to a CS1 series CPU set the following communication condi tions for the PC Setup area Since the settings shown below are the PC default settings for the CPU no change to the PC Setup is necessary as long as the communication speed is maintained at 9600 bps 63 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Item Setting at Host Communication speed Set the same speed as set at the NT631 NT631C 1 Stop bits 2 stop bits Parity Even Data length ASCII 7 bits Unit No for the host link 00 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For detai
222. ish the high speed 1 N NT Link Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Reference The following table shows which CS1 series PCs can be connected to an NT631 NT631C with the high speed 1 N NT Link through RS 422A RS 485 PCs supporting direct connection to PCs supporting connection through a the CPU Unit Serial Communication Board CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 E V1 1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 E V1 1 1 A CS1W SCB41 E Serial Communication Board is required Settings at the Host Connecting to a CS1 Series Serial Communication Board Serial Communications Board equipped with an RS 422A 485 port for CS1 se ries CPU Units CS1W SCB41 Port 2 is an RS 422A 485 port Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot num ber 991220 12 20 99 and later support the high speed 1 N NT Link Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used Setting the Front Switches m RDY m COMM1 COMM2 Port 1 a RS 232C K og Terminator Switch TERM o Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE Port 2 RS 422A Set to 4 right side for 4 wire type RS 422A 485 RS 485 Set to 2 left side for 2 wire type Allocation DM area settings for CPU Settings are written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After settings are written
223. itch The menu items in the System Menu are displayed on the NT631 NT631C screen as touch switches Menu items can be selected simply by pressing them Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Example Displaying the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen by pressing Maintenance Mode in the System Menu Ver 3 10 Press Maintenance Mode Switching from the Return to the RUN mode by selecting Quit in the System Menu and other menus System Menu to the RUN Mode Reference Unlike previous PT models the NT631 NT631C does not return to the RUN mode automatically if no operations are performed 6 4 Memory Initialization The NT631 NT631C has the following initialization functions Use them as nec essary e Clearing screen data Page 131 e Initializing memory tables Page 137 e Initializing memory switches Page 138 e Initializing display history record data Page 133 e Initializing alarm history record data Page 134 e Initializing recipe tables Page 136 Reference If writing to the screen data memory has been disabled by the System Setting setting in the System Installer mode memory initialization is not possible 6 4 1 Clearing Screen Data Use this function if the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631 NT631C cannot be started up correctly This operation clears initializes only the screen data and contents of the cal culation tables The memory switch settings and display hist
224. itialization and Transmission The table below shows the errors that can occur when the NT631 NT631C data is initialized and during data setting and transmission and their remedies Message Flash Memory Error Flash Memory I O Error If this happens frequently Flash Memory may be broken Press Reset Switch to restart There is a hardware fault or the flash memory memory for storing screen data has reached the end of its service life If the same message is displayed even after clearing the screen data or transmitting screen data several times contact your OMRON service center Calendar Data Error Calendar Data is incorrect Set to the MAINTENANCE MODE and set Calendar Data Hardware fault or system program error Set the calendar clock again from the System Menu If the problem recurs delete the program in the System Installer mode then re install the program 6 5 2 Clearing Installing the System Program page 140 If this does not solve the problem contact your OMRON service center Tool Transmit Error x Error detected while downloading by the following case e faulty connecting cable e corrupted data by noise The connecting cable is defective Check the cable connection and perform a conductivity test If there is a fault replace the cable Appendix F Making the Cable for Connecting a PC page 263 Malfunction due to external noise Carry out grounding work in accordanc
225. itions 1 2 3 1 In cases where the distance between the NT631 NT631C is small and it is assumed that there is no potential difference between grounds ground as shown in Fig a below 2 In cases where there is a potential difference between the grounds of the NT631 NT631C and the host ground as shown in Fig b If there is some distance between the NT631 NT631C and host and grounding at a single point is difficult do not connect the functional ground terminal gt of the NT631 NT631C 3 If the NT631 NT631C is installed in the same panel as equipment that gen erates noise such as a motor or inverter do not ground the functional ground terminal of the NT631 NT631C NT631 i NT631 NT631C ost NT631C E L L Ground to L 100 Q max Grounding at a single point Fig a Fig b Note Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent operating errors due to noise 32 Connecting a Printer Section 3 3 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool In order to install the system program in the NT631 NT631C or to transmit screen data created with the Support Tool to the NT631 NT631C the NT631 NT631C must be connected to a personal computer with an RS 232C cable The NT631 NT631C connects the RS 232C cable from a personal computer at serial port A When the host is connected at serial port B the connection with the host can be maintained as it is while the NT631 NT631C is connected to the RS 232C cable from a pers
226. k ks Be Gl e Bee es Be esis Sak ee x Kx a AnbPBWNNY m vi Table of contents SECTION 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port 4 1 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host 0008 4 1 1 Host Types and Settings 00 0 ee eee ee 4 1 2 Connecting Directly between RS 232C Ports SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port 5 1 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port 0 0 cee eee eee 5 1 1 The Type of Host and Settings 00000 5 1 2 1 1 Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the Host sce ee eee eb ee eee eb ee eee es 5 1 3 1 N Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the HOST coat se ss aed Ae ae a hae ec aes 5 1 4 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals 5 1 5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port 0 0 00 eee ee eee 5 2 1 Host Types and Settings 0 0 eee eee eee eee 5 2 2 Direct Connection between RS 422A Ports at Both Units 5 2 3 Direct Connection between RS 485 Ports at Both Units 5 2 4 1 N Connection among RS 422A Ports 000000 5 2 5 1 N Connection among RS 485 Ports 000000 5 2 6 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals 5 2 7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A
227. l V061 E1 L When the system program is cleared by mistake it becomes impossible to use the NT631 NT631C at all Check that the system installer is installed at the Support Tool side before deleting the program However note that the regis tered screen data and memory switch settings are retained It becomes possible to install the system program inside the memory unit auto matically by installing the memory unit at startup Refer to 3 5 Using Memory Unit VL Versions Clear install the system program by following the menu operation from the Sys tem Installer mode menu shown below Clearing the System Program Select Download System Program 4 Select Yes Dowload Svscem Fregram H The system program is cleared During clear ee ret ance the message Erasing is displayed Retura to Menu Yes e If Return to Menu is selected the NT631 NT631C returns to the System Install er mode menu without clearing the system program e If clearance fails a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed On completion of system program clearance the NT631 NT631C enters the standby status for downloading of the system program 141 Operations in the System Installer Mode Section 6 5 Downloading the System Program Reference On normal completion of system program clearance the standby status for sys tem program downloading is auto
228. l is turned OFF prohibiting the next input until the read data has been notified to the host Because of this when the Auto setting is made the next input is not possible until the data has been notified to the host However when the setting is Auto and the RS CS signals of the cable are shorted RS CS control is ineffective Consequently data input from the bar code reader to the NT631 NT631C is updated regardless of whether or not the data is notified to the host 35 Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 3 4 3 Data Format For details refer to the instruction manual for the bar code reader used The data format for communication when using the bar code input function of the NT631 NT631C is shown below 02H 03H The characters which are effective as data are hexadecimal codes from 20 to 7FH and the maximum data length is 40 bytes Data which does not follow the data format described above is invalidated and discarded 3 5 Using a Memory Unit V_ Versions Reference This section discusses the use of a memory unit with a V1 or V2 version of an NT631 NT631C PT NT631 ST211LJ EVLJ NT631C ST141L EVL NT631C ST151L EVL Depending on the PT model and the system program which is installed the func tion and using method of memory unit varies as follows PT Model System Program Function of Memory Unit With Ear
229. lier than Ver 2 Conventional memory unit function Refer to 56 it ipar System programs can not be transmitted using VE suffix Ver 2 or later memory unit With V Earlier than Ver 2 New memory unit function l ffi System programs can be transmitted using SUTTIX Ver 2 or later memory unit The memory unit functions are determined by the model of PT being used re gardless of the version of the system program installed in the PT By installing a memory unit NT MF261 on the NT631 NT631C the screen data in the NT631 NT631C can be recorded backed up in the memory unit In addition the screen data in the memory unit can be automatically read into the NT631 NT631C when it starts up This means that system program and screen data can be changed easily at the operation site without connecting to the Sup port Tool The data in the memory unit is retained without backup by a battery or other means In systems where there are frequent setup changes by preparing a number of memory units in advance and recording screen data in them in accordance with the control performed in each case the NT631 NT631C screen data can be changed simply by installing the memory unit without connecting to the Support Tool In addition even if NT631 NT631C is replaced the previous status can be main tained simply by installing the memory unit that retains the system program and screen data of the previous NT631 NT631C By using t
230. llowable power supply voltage range 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 to 10 Allowable power interruption time No regulation Power consumption 30 W max 18 W max Power starting time 200 ms max Operating ambient temperature 0 to 50 C 0 to 40 C 0 to 50 C Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C Operating ambient humidity 35 to 85 with no condensation Operating environment No corrosive gases Common mode 1000 Vp p between power supply terminals and panel Noise resistance Normal mode 300 Vp p Pulse width of 100 ns to 1 us pulse rise time of 1 ns 10 to 57 Hz with 10 to 57 Hz with 0 075 mm amplitude 0 075 mm amplitude 57 to 150 Hz with 1G 9 8 m s2 acceleration for 30 minutes in each of for 30 minutes in each of X Y Z directions X Y Z directions 147 m s2 15G 3 times in each of X Y and Z directions 315 W 250 H 54 D mm With expansion unit mounted 315 W 250 H 74 D mm Weight 2 5 kg max Vibration resistance operating Shock resistance operating Dimensions 184 5x 131 25 mm 0 0 Circle of panel pressure 1 6 to 4 8 mm Panel cutout dimensions Enclosure ratings Front panel Equivalent to IP65F NEMA4 Grounding D type grounding Ground to 100 Q or less The NT631 NT631C may not be used at a location where it is exposed to splashing oil for a long period 241 Spec
231. llowing e Connecting to a CVM1 CV series EV_ CPUs e CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 e CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 PC Setup When connecting to the CVM1 CV series CPU by the NT Link 1 1 method no particular settings are required at the PC Setup Setting the Front Switches Host link communication method selection selector switch z Set this to RS 422A 1 0 port selector switch RS 232C l RS 422A Communication type setting DIP SW3 Set this switch to ON for communication by NT Link Terminator setting DIP SW6 Set this switch to ON Set terminator ON e Connecting to a C series C200HX HG HE Z E PC Setup Area Settings Write the PC Setup area data memory settings directly from a Programming Device e g CX Programmer in accordance with the host model Port A of C200HX HG HE Z E DM6555 4000 Use NT Link 1 1 Port 2 of CQM1H 2 DM6550 4000 1 RS 422A port of the communication board 2 RS 422A port of the Serial Communications Board For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area refer to the manual for the PC you are using Setting the DIP Switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communication Board Set the switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E communication board as follows Switch 1 Set to 4 4 wire type for RS 422A Switch 2 Set to ON for terminator ON termination resistance applied
232. ls refer to Settings the Host Link Method page 150 When the communication speed is set to 19200 bps the PC Setup of the CPU need to be changed Either set the PC Setup directly from a Programming Device Programming Console or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device CX Pro grammer to the CPU For details on PC Setup refer to the SYSMAC CS1 series Operation Manual W339 E1 When using the built in RS 232C port of CS1G H Writing Value Settings Host link mode data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity Communication speed 9600 bps Communication speed 19200 bps Unit 00 Writing Value Settings 8000 Host link mode data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity 0000 Communication speed 9600 bps 0007 Communication speed 19200 bps 0000 Unit 00 64 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Peripheral port This is used mainly for connection to the Programming Device This also supports the Setting the Front Switches Set the CPU DIP switches to 4 or 5 in accordance with the port NT631 NT631C is connected to O RUN O ERR ALM O INH COPRPHL COMM RS 232C unit connection RS 232 port This is used mainly for OMRON a DIP switches inside the battery storage e Set SW4 to ON establishing communication in accor ae dance with PC Setup when connecting the A OPEN NT631 NT631C to a peripher
233. ly written into the PT The messages Preparing Transmitting Verifying and Finished are dis played on the screen in accordance with the progress of data writing When messages Preparing Transmitting and Verifying are displayed the RUN LED flashes and when the message Finished is displayed the RUN LED lights 3 Switch the NT631 NT631C power OFF and remove the memory unit To operate NT631 NT631C continuously switch the NT631 NT631C power back ON In this method the direction of transmission and area of the memory unit used are set by touch switch operations at the NT631 NT631C Transmission can be executed while checking the settings When data is written to the NT631 NT631C or memory unit the data that has been stored up until that point is lost Method of Execution Use the following procedure to read and write screen data using manual trans mission 1 Check that the NT631 NT631C power is OFF then set the DIP switches on the memory unit as follows 1234 L234 ln m a l kl OFF OFF SW1 SW2 Setting of SW2 3 not relevant In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors it is advisable to set SW2 1 and SW2 2 so as to disable writing to the unit from which the data is to be read 2 Switch the NT631 NT631C power ON The screen shown below is displayed Example Current PT Screen Data The comment for t
234. m 19 200 bps us Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON 55 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 C1000H C2000H Backplane mounted type C500 LK203 Setting the Rear Switches I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C 5V supply ON OFF y Unit parity and transfer code I O port DIP SW1 1 to SW1 7 RS 422A f RS 232C Set SW1 1 to SW1 7 to OFF 0 ANorAaarno Synchronization Internal f i External 4 Synchronization selector switch Terminator Set this to Internal OFF ON EO PE 5 _ Communications speed CTS cm DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 ena t Set these switches to 0010 to select ae pull 19 200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9 600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N ___ Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON C200H C1000H C2000H CPU mounting type 3G2A6 LK201 EV1 Setting the Rear Switches m Unit parity and transfer c
235. m cable max 2 m e Method in which the RS 422A ports of multiple NT631 NT631Cs and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection via an RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit page 88 This connection method is used with the RS 422A type NT Link 1 N meth od PT RS 232C RS422A Host convertor unit RS 422A cable max total length 500 m max 2 m e Method in which the RS 485 ports of multiple NT631 NT631Cs and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection via an RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit page 88 This connection method is used with the RS 485 type NT Link 1 N method standard or high speed EL RS 232C RS422A Host convertor unit RS 485 cable RS 232 max total length cable 500 m max 2 m EE 82 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Note One end of the wire must always be connected to the host PC and there must be no branching Branching will cause problems such as transmission delays and communication failures O x x PC At termination PC PC Relay terminal block Relay terminal block Max 2 NT631C NT631 NT631 NT631 NT631 NT631C NT631 NT631 NT631C NT631 Not at Not at At termination termination Not at termination termination S N Ve Example of Good Connection Exa
236. m Maintenance Section 6 11 Display set clock data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Kanth 98 Ly War Cay lal s 118 al cn E Sed Horth 98 wu War 118 BI a i Select Maintenance Mode Select Calendar Check Press Set If you are just checking the display press Quit at this point the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen Set the date Each of the digits of the year month date hour minute and second settings and the day of the week setting are touch switches press these touch switches to change the cor responding settings Press Quit The clock data is set and the NT631 NT631C returns to the date and time display Pressing Abort causes the NT631 NT631C to return to the date and time display without executing setting with the previous settings still effective 186 System Maintenance Section 6 14 6 11 3 Checking the PT Setting Status The direct connection settings of the NT631 NT631C screen data and the set tings for serial port A and serial port B can be checked Screen Configuration There are the following three PT setting status screens and Display Contents F Ma asom A next screen comm Patio Der aear Homer T next screen Dm Pa F Theo o k at z i 1 PF hii previous screen sd us 4 previous screen next screen
237. manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given iii Related Manuals Related manuals are listed below The LJ symbol at the end of the catalog number is the revision number Connecting and Setting Up the Programmable Terminal e NT631 and NT631C PT Setup Manual V063 E1 L this manual This manual describes connecting the Programmable Terminals to a host and peripheral devices and settings required for communications and applications The functions and actual operating methods for the NT631 and NT631C PTs are provided in the Reference Manual V064 E1 L Programmable Terminal Functions and Operation e NT31 31C 631 631C PT Reference Manual V064 E1 L This manual is used for any of the following PTs NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C It describes screen configurations part functions host control meth ods and other application information PT connection and setup procedures are described in the NT631 and NT631C PT Setup Manual V063 E1 L Creating and Transferring Screen Data and Installing the System Program e NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 Operation Manual V061 E1 L The screens displayed on the NT631 and NT6
238. matically established When the NT631 NT631C enters this status Lewnload Susten Progra transmit the system program from the system installer at the personal computer During downloading the progress of trans mission is indicated on the screen Ready fer dowloading 5 Select Run System Download Sustem Pregram Downloading s completed Rri ushe If Abort is selected during standby for downloading or during downloading a screen asking whether you wish to download again is displayed When the system program is started the NT631 NT631C starts up normally If no screen data has been registered an error message will be displayed indicat ing that screen data hasn t been registered Transfer the screen data and pro ceed If the new system program is not downloaded successfully after deleting a sys tem program it is not possible to use the NT631 NT631C at all After deleting the system program be sure to download a new one 6 5 3 Changing the System Settings 142 The NT631 NT631C allows the following settings to be made to prevent the screen data and memory switch settings from being changed or deleted by oper ating errors Disabling enabling System Menu Display When System Menu display is disabled by this setting the System Menu cannot be displayed by touch panel operations or by using the touch switches Howev er if a error occurs the System Menu can be displayed from the error message screen Disablin
239. mode Refer to the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C s Ba the Memory link re page 140 Programmable Terminal Reference Manual er to pages 69 and 112 le and the Support Tool Operation Manual Transmit the screen data page 144 Vv Set the memory switches page 147 y y Connect to the Connect to the host NT631 NT631C When RS 232C used at the PT refer to section 4 When RS 422A 485 used at the PT refer to section 5 y Confirm the settings and Create the host program check communication Start operation 1 System program installation is only done in special circumstances for example when changing the system program or to recover the original status of the installed program This operation is not normally necessary When using other PC models sequencers however it is necessary to install specific system programs 2 Display of the system menu and all change operations can be inhibited This enables you to prevent the accidental deletion or alteration of screens and settings Reference For the system program use the NT631 NT631C system program supplied as an accessory with the NT series Support Tool NT ZJCAT1 EV4 e For the Support Tool use NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 Refer to the following manuals for the devices and software Device or Software Manual Title Manual Number NT31 NT31C Reference Manual V064 E1 1 NT631 NT631C System Installe
240. mode will not be established 6 4 2 Initializing Display History Record Data Reference The display history record function keeps a record of the order of display of the screens displayed during operation and the number of times each screen is dis played These records are kept only for screens for which the History attribute has been set The maximum number of records is 1024 for sort by occurrence order of display occurrence and 255 for sort by frequency order of the number of times each screen has been displayed Use the display history record initialization function to clear the history record data to 0 for example when the screen data has been changed etc Also if Alarm Use Ring Buffer under History Setting of System in PT Configuration Tools has not been checked no more records will be stored after the maximum number of records has been kept and therefore the records must be periodically initialized If Alarm Use Ring Buffer is checked when the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded The NT631 NT631C also allows the display history record data to be initialized by controlling the PT status control area from the host For details refer to 2 2 7 PT Status Control Area in the Reference Manual 133 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Initialize the display history record data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver
241. mples of Bad Connections Reference CS1 series CPUs cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT Link method Use the 1 N connection NT Link method standard or high speed instead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 69 or Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 73 5 1 1 The Type of Host and Settings The using condition is the same as the connecting PT side RS 232C and the host side RS 232C For the available type and settings of the host refer to the pages listed below Method Reference Host link Host Link Method page 52 NT Link 1 1 NT Link 1 1 method page 65 NT Link 1 N Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 69 High speed NT Link 1 N Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method page 73 Memory link Memory Link Method page 76 83 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Settings at the When making a connection between RS 232C and RS 422A 485 ports using an RS 232C RS 422A RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit set the DIP switches on the NT ALO01 as fol Convertor Unit lows NT AL001 Example the terminal resistor is active RS 422A NT Link 1 N ON e Built in terminal resistor setting DIP SW1 2 If at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable set this switch to ON to activate the built in terminal resistor If not at the end of
242. n FA computer etc When connecting to the host in the memory link method it is necessary to create a program for the memory link at the host side The following are the communication conditions that can be used in the memory link method For the host a personal computer an FA computer etc its setting should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the follow ing table Set the same communication conditions at the NT631 NT631C by the memory switch page 155 Item Settings at the host Input Output port RS 232C Communication speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Data bits length 7 bits 8 bits Stop bits length 1 bits 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None RS CS XON XOFF 4 1 2 Connecting Directly between RS 232C Ports The method for connection between the RS 232C ports of the NT631 NT631C and the host is described here NT631 NT631C Host link unit CPU SYSMAC C series PC CVM1 CV series PC SRM1 t ial AorB F 9 pin connector rz he Doc Sain type TE ane connector 25 pin connector 76 Cable with RS 232C connectors Recommended Connector Cable When making the connector cable as far as possible use the recommended connectors connector hoods and cables indicated in the table below Some units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood Check the required components and prepare them in advance
243. n be connected to the NT631 NT631C by the NT link 1 N method using the RS 232C ports of both units are indicated in the table below 69 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 PC CPUs with Built in NT Link CPUs Connectable with Connectable Series Function Communication Board Unit to CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 EV1_ CS1G CPU42 43 44 45 EV1 1 CS1H CPU63 64 65 CS1H CPU63 64 65 66 67 EV1 C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HE CPU42 Z EC2 C200HG CPU33 Z EC C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z EC as C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HE Z E nN C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z EC SONG CAE C200HG CPU63 Z EC C200HX CPU34 ZEC C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU44 Z C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU54 Z EC C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU64 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 3 CQM1H CPU61 3 AA AA ae ees Sk C200HX Z E SRM1 C02 V2 1 A CS1W SCB21 or CS1W SCB41 Serial Communication Board or CS1W SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required 2 One of the following Communication Boards is required C200HW COM02 COM04 COM05 COMO06 EV1 3 A CQM1H SCB41 Serial Communication Board is required Reference The V1 versions of CS1 series PCs support the high speed 1 N NT Link as well as the standard 1 N NT Link Furthermore the high speed 1 N NT Link can be used in earlier versions of CS1 series PCs by installing a new version of Serial Communications Boar
244. n connector which allows selection of the RS 232C or RS 422A method When this port is used with the RS 232C meth od the I O port selector switch on the front of the unit must be set to RS 232C the upper position CPU Bus Unit Settings When connecting to a CVM1 CV series host link unit set the following commu nication conditions for the CPU bus unit settings Item Setting at Host Communications speed Set the same speed as set at the NT631 NT631C 1 Transfer code ASCIl 7 data bits 2 stop bits Parity Even 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Setting the Host Link Method page150 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT631 NT631C in a single host link Set the CPU bus unit settings directly from a Programming Device e g CX Pro grammer For details on the CPU bus unit settings refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit Operation Manual W205 E1 57 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 Setting The Front Switches Unit SW3 SW4 When using communication port 2 set these Communications port 1 switches to 0 RS 232C I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C Communications port 2 RS 232C RS 422A
245. n is used e OFF The resume function is not used The default factory setting is OFF e When the voltage of the NT631 NT631C s built in battery becomes low the memory table contents cannot be retained even if ON is set for the resume function e For details on the resume record function refer to 2 15 3 Resume Function in the Reference Manual 171 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Set the resume function by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press J next screen or T previous screen to display the second memory switch setting screen Pia tis kuia Press Resume Function to display the re rae Se eo quired setting SS a The setting option changes each time the HEIO ain touch switch is pressed ay 17 nF To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6
246. n was started e If writing of the settings fails a screen asking whether you wish to try again is displayed After the settings have been written the System Installer mode menu screen is redisplayed 6 5 4 Clearing Screen Data If the screen data has been corrupted and the NT631 NT631C cannot be started normally use this function to clear the screen data Note that only the screen data is cleared initialized and the memory switch set tings and the display history alarm history record data are retained Reference e When this function is used all of the screen data contents registered in the NT631 NT631C up to that point are cleared Check that the created screens are backed up at the Support Tool before using it e The screen data can also be cleared from the System Menu page 131 e f the screen data is cleared in the System Installer mode the message Screen Data Corrupted may be displayed on switching to the RUN mode If this hap pens initialize the screen data again from the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 143 Transmitting the Screen Data Section 6 6 Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Installer mode menu shown below Select Erase Screen Data E Select Yes arase Screen ate The screen data is cleared During clear Ave you sure ance the message Erasing is displayed Retura to Menu Yes e f Return to Menu is selected t
247. nction for setting and displaying the date and time Lalal Ld Lula rai The brightness is set and the NT631 NT631C returns to the previous screen This section describes how to display and set the clock data by menu operation from the System Menu Reference The clock function does not strictly check the date and day of the week set tings When setting the clock data be sure to set the correct date and day of the week If a mistake is made for example entering a value in the range 13 to 19 when entering the month the buzzer sounds three times Make sure that the data is correct when the month changes Numeral memory tables 247 to 255 are reserved for the clock function Clock data can be displayed and set during operation of the NT631 NT631C by using these numeral memory tables For details on the clock function refer to 3 10 Display and Setting of Calendar Clock in the Reference Manual No clock data is set on shipment from the factory The clock data is backed up by the built in battery of the NT631 NT631C If the battery voltage becomes low the clock data cannot be retained when the pow er to the NT631 NT631C is turned OFF or the NT631 NT631C is reset and the clock function will not operate correctly When writing to the screen data memory is disabled by the setting made for System Setting in the System Installer mode it is not possible to set the date and time 185 Syste
248. nd Operation of the NT631 NT631C 0 ee ee eee 2 1 1 1 Operation of an NT631 NT631C at an FA Production Site 2 1 1 2 Operations of the NT631 NT631C 0 00 eee 3 1 2 Functions of the NT631I NT631C 0 ee eee 4 1 2 1 Features marean cine ie he wt es WATS ARO Saas Wharton es 6 ads 4 1 2 2 Comparison between NT631 and NT631C 0 02006 5 1 2 3 Additional Functions of the V2 Versions 2 0 eee eee 5 1 2 4 Comparison between NT620S NT620C NT625C and NTO3I NTO3I C seis O54 6h ke R RRS A ete pa E R 6 1 2 5 Principal Functions of NT631 NT631C 2 eee 8 1 2 6 DIS plays cessor cate ek see etith aaah Satta Oe ale A tia a be cir 10 1 3 System Configuration 0 0 0 n a cee ERE nee 15 1 3 1 Peripheral Devices That Can Be Connected 15 1 3 2 Connecting to the Host 0 cece eee eee 16 1 4 Communication with the Host 0 eee eee eee 16 1 4 1 Direct Connection Function 0 0 0 cee eee eee 16 1 4 2 Host DINK sr aea na e tii a ein aes ak hat a a A as are whee eens 17 1 4 3 1 Ea Wo cere ee ei ae PPR a a SP oe ea 17 1 4 4 Connecting to Other Companies PCs 0000 18 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links 00 000 000005 19 1 5 1 Memory Link 2 tei gs ites ies nda Ect wie earl peet anaes dethysss 19 1 5 2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link 19 1 5 3 Memory Link Online Transfer F
249. ndow Touch switches can be made to light or flash in accordance with the status of a host bit in the same way as lamps The following 8 types of display graphic can be used for touch switches Standard shadow 3 dimension no display frame rectangle circle poly gon sector 11 Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 When rectangle circle polygon or sector is selected as the shape the area within which pressing of the touch switch is sensed the touch switch area can be set independently of the position where the display graphic is set When this Touch position is ea switch area pressed es __ video Display frame h Function executed There are four touch switch labels fixed display character strings ON OFF switching character strings numeral displays and character string displays When fixed display character strings or ON OFF switching character strings are used several lines of labels can be displayed Numeral Display Numeric values stored in the numeral memory tables are displayed The dis played numerals can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral memory tables Hexadecimal values can also be displayed When decimal values are displayed the number of digits for the integral part and fractional part of displayed values can be specified in advance String Display Character strings stored in the character string memory tables are displayed The displa
250. ne graphs trend graphs and analogue meter graphs can be displayed using numeral memory tables Lamp display Lamps can be turned on and flashed under the control of the host It is also possible to display different graphics in the ON and OFF states Alarm list history display y Warning messages are automatically displayed in a list in response to the state of a host bit The time and the number of times of the messages appeared can also be displayed gt y WVAVAV Functions relating to data output Buzzer A built in buzzer can be sounded Screen printing A hard copy of the currently displayed screen can be printed at the printer connected to the NT631 NT631C Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 Functions relating to data input Input by touch switches Data can be input by simply touching touch switches displayed on the screen The possible functions of touch switches include sending data to the host and changing the screen display Inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when interlock bits have been allocated Pop up window function A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch switch In addition to fixed character and graphic displays control keys and character keys created as touch switches can also be set inside the window A maximum of three windows can be displayed simultaneously Since
251. nel cable is disconnected Follow the above steps from 1 and check the lock status of the connector Before starting normal operation confirm that the following tests can be executed correctly by using the I O check in the Maintenance menu Also perform a communication test with the host e Touch switch e Backlight On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally start opera tion Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Section 7 3 NT631C CFLO2 for NT631C ST141 _ EV2 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Turn the power supply to the NT631C OFF Be sure to do so to avoid an electric shock 2 Disconnect the terminal block wiring the communication cable and the printer cable If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted remove that unit also 3 Loosen four screws at corners on the rear face of the NT631C and remove the rear case Be careful not to lose these screws From this step on exert added care not to touch any electronic parts or printed circuit boards inside the unit Otherwise the PT may sustain static damage 4 Disengage two backlight connectors at the top and the bottom and pull out two touch panel cables at the top Removing and Fitting The Touch Panel Cable Removing The Touch Panel Cable Pull the arrow marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector and remove the cable oo Fitting The Touch Panel Cable While unlocking the connector
252. ng procedures e Press the OK touch switch to re turn to the memory unit manual transmission screen make the correct settings then try again e Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF correct the DIP switches settings of the memory unit then turn the power back ON Flash memory error An error occurred during initialization of the NT631 NT631C or memory unit flash memory or during write processing Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF then back ON If the error recurs the flash memory at the write destination may be faulty In this case replace the unit Verify error An error occurred during verification processing at the flash memory of the NT631 NT631C or the memory unit Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF then back ON If the error recurs the flash memory at the write destination may be faulty In this case replace the unit Transmitting data error The automatic transmission only An attempt is made to transmit data other than a system program or the system program of a different PC model into the NT631 NT631C as the system program An attempt is made to write a system program into the NT631 NT631C as screen data Perform either of the following procedures e Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF correct the DIP switch set tings of the memory unit and then turn the power back ON Turn the NT631 NT631C power OFF set the DIP switch settings to the manual transmission and then check the
253. ng them If incorrect the system may operate unpredictably Press the Quit touch switch on the System Menu screen or other screen The NT631 NT631C switches to the RUN mode and starts operation The operation at the start is as follows Display of The System Initialization Screen When establishing the communication with a host the System initializing char acter string is displayed on the screen If the communication with the host cannot be established the System initializing screen remains up If this is the case check the settings at the host and the PT side the cables and wiring In addition creating screen number 9000 enables the display of a screen other than the System initialization screen Transmission of The Contents of Memory Tables If the Resume Function memory switch is set to ON or if the initial values of the memory tables are used the contents of the numeral character string memory tables are copied to the allocated words at the host L Display of The Startup Screen The startup screen is displayed on reading the contents screen number of the screen to be displayed of the first word of the PT status control area If the contents are not correct for a screen number or there is no data registered for the set screen number an error message is displayed Execute the host program and confirm that the following operations are per formed normally e Confirm that the NT631 NT631C screens switch in accord
254. ngs Breer Derta ap oak bail beres Fi al ol m E hiss On FRE h a OFF 4 Disp Hay of Lam Torch M Bo Disp ka of hmo Table Ho Dispi of naga Librin fio Diep Hy of Broker Line Fran i FF iN a OFF 194 Select Maintenance Mode Select Screen Data Disp Specify the screen to be displayed in the input field in the middle of the screen Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated and keys Press Set Press the touch switches to specify the dis play method in each case The setting option changes each time a touch switch is pressed System Maintenance Section 6 11 6 11 7 Device Check Checking the Buzzer p Press Quit to return to the screen number selection screen BOILER OPERATION T 015003 T 015301 RUN STOP L 020005 L 020000 Error Stop Confirmation Confirmation T 016312 ERROR L 020013 Occurrence Touching the top or bottom of the screen changes the way the display elements over lap each other in the order in which they are registered In this example the bottom portion of the touch switch which is under the lamp will be displayed over the lamp 4 BOILER OPERATION T 015301 STOP L 020005 T 015003 RUN L 020000 Error Stop Confirmation Confirmation T 016312 ERROR L 020013
255. ngs and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 10 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function The NT631 NT631C has a bar code reader input function which allows a bar code reader to be connected and bar code data to read as character strings into character string input fields 177 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Section 6 10 This section describes the communication conditions for the bar code reader and the setting method for confirming the input data Reference e For details on bar code reader types and connection methods refer to 3 4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader in this manual and for details on how to use a bar code reader refer to 3 7 Inout of Numeric Values and Character Strings in the Reference Manual e The bar code reader is connected to serial port A This means that serial port B must be used for communications with the host Communication Condition Settings for Bar Code Readers Setting Item Function Setting Options Data bit length Sets the bit length for the data bits 7 or 8 bits Page 180 Stop bit length Sets the stop bit length for the data 1 or 2 bits P
256. not be displayed by operation from the System Menu e Only the user screens Nos 1 to 3999 can be displayed Screens for system use cannot be displayed 192 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Specifying The Display Method Specify the display method for the screens as indicated in the table below Setting Setting Item Function Options Display of Lamp Allows designation of whether the bit number of the lamp bit set for a lamp or touch Touch SW No switch is displayed or not The display format is as follows LUOOOOOOO C area type QOOOOOCC bit number Display of Memory Allows designation of whether the table numbers of numeral and character string ON OFF Table No memory tables are displayed or not The display format for numeral memory tables is NOOOO and the display format for character string memory tables is SOOOO This function is valid for the following display elements Numeral displays Character string displays Bar graphs Numeral setting input fields including thumbwheel type Character string input fields Display of image Allows designation of whether image library code numbers are displayed or not ON OFF Library No Display of Broken Allows designation of whether or not broken line frames are displayed around the ON OFF Line Frame display elements for showing the positions registered Default factory setting Reference Each
257. ns Units with lot num ber 991220 12 20 99 and later support the high speed 1 N NT Link Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used Setting the Front Switches Set the unit number of the serial communication unit by using the rotary switch located on the front panel Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following Set the unit number to 0 through F so that it will not overlap with the numbers used in other units Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Setting is written from the Programming Device a Programming Console or CX Programmer directly into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or execution of the STUP command In the following table the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and set tings are shown 75 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 When Using the Memory Link Method Word m DM30000 100 x unit number Allocation DM area CH Writing Port 1 Port 2 Value Settings NT link 1 N mode Communications baud rate high speed The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 In the memory link method the connection can be made to a personal computer with RS 232 and a
258. ns speed 9600 bps Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps Unit 00 104 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Connecting to a CPM2C The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS1 series PCs The CPM2C s communication port handles both RS 232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally Therefore when using the CPM2C it is necessary to select RS 232C or peripheral port connections according to the kind of cable and port on the cable used as shown in the fol lowing table Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details Peripheral port CPM2C CN111 OPM2C cs1W CN114 CPM2C RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin female Setting Switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E Communication Board Set the switches on a C200HX HG HE Z E communication board as follows Switch 1 Set to 4 4 wire type for RS 422A Switch 2 Set to ON for terminator ON termination resistance applied Setting Switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board Set the switches on a CQM1H Serial Communications Board as follows Wire selection WIRE Set to 4 4 wire type for RS 422A Terminator TERM Set to ON for termination ON Peripheral port Serial Communications Board Inner Board slot 1 Terminator Switch TERM Set to ON right side Wire Selection Switch WIRE Set to 4 right side S
259. ntage within the range 100 to 100 of a preset value 60 Analogue meter Analogue meters display using a quarter half or full circle shape the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a percentage within the range 100 to 100 of the preset value Users can choose from moving pointer type and filling area type displays Users can also add graduation to the graph 60 Broken line graphs Broken line graphs display in an easy to read form a sequence of numeral memory table values converted to a percentage within the range 100 to 100 of a preset value 100 0 Example showing a series of 11 numeral memory table values with a check mark set for the 100 display sign Trend graphs Trend graphs display chronological changes in the value in a numeral memory table converting the value to a percentage within the range 100 to 100 of a preset value The trend graph shifts position with the passage of time Past data can also be recorded and the numeral memory table can be read sampled even while the trend graph is not being displayed The user can choose to stop sampling restart sampling or display past data by pressing touch switches 13 Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 Alarm List History Recipe 14 The alarm list history function displays messages in list form or graphics image library data in accord
260. nual sending SW1 5 SW1 6 OFF Complies with CS control of RS 232C ON Data sent at CS H SW1 5 SW1 6 OFF Complies with CS control of RS 232C ON Data sent at CS L When using the host link or NT link 1 1 set the RS 422A send mode to continual sending set both SW1 5 and 6 OFF When using the NT link 1 N set the RS 422A send mode to complies with CS control of RS 232C i e one of SW1 5 and SW1 6 must be ON Note 1 Do not set both SW1 5 and SW1 6 ON at the same time This may damage internal circuits 2 The power supply to the device supplying 5 V must be turned OFF before starting wiring work 3 Before connecting the RS 232C cable and turning on the power to an RS 232C device such as a PT i e turning on the power to the convertor unit check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP switch settings are correct If the power is turned on while there is a wiring fault the internal circuits of the convertor unit or the RS 232C device may be damaged 4 When the convertor unit is connected to a C200HX HG HE Z E model of OMRON PC as an RS 422A device set DIP switches SW1 5 and SW1 6 as indicated below SW1 5 SW1 6 e OFF ON 256 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit Appendix C Pin Arrangement The convertor unit has a terminal block for an RS 422A 485 interface connection and a connector for an RS 232C interface connection The pin ar
261. nventions and their Meanings Z N WARNING Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and cor rectly This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate cautions warnings and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the NT631 631C The cautions warnings and dangers shown here contain important information related to safety This instructions in these cautions warnings and dangers must be observed The conventions used and their meanings are presented below Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury Safety Precautions 3 N Caution Indicates information that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or mi nor injury damage to the product or faulty operation N WARNING Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any inter nal parts while the power is being supplied Doing either of ON these may result in electrical shock N WARNING Switch OFF the NT631C power before replacing the backlight Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock xi SECTION 1 General This section provides fundamental information about the functions and features of the NT631 NT631C types of connection communication methods etc This information will enable you to understand the applications of the NT631 NT631C 1 1 Role a
262. nvertor unit and prize it free Mounting to an Operation Panel Drill two mounting screw holes in an operation panel with a thickness of at least 2 mm 0 08 inch and secure the convertor unit with screws Units mm inch Note In order to ensure a secure and strong mount mount the convertor unit in an operation panel with a thick ness of at least 2 mm 0 08 inch Specifications The general specifications and communications specifications of the convertor unit are shown below General Specifications Specification Dimensions 30 W 114 H 100 2 D mm with the RS 422A terminal block cover closed 30 W 114 H 119 5 D mm with the RS 422A terminal block cover open Weight 200 g max Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH with no condensation Rated power supply voltage 5 V 10 using pin No 6 of the RS 232C connector Rated power supply current 150 mA max Rush current 0 8 A max Insulation resistance 20 MQ or higher measured between all RS 422A terminal signal lines collectively and functional ground terminal with a 500 VDC megger Dielectric strength 1500 VAC for 1 minute between all RS 422A terminal signal lines collectively and functional ground terminal Leakage current 10 mA max Operating environment No corrosive gases 254 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit Storage ambient temperature Appendix C
263. ock function that controls touch switches numeral inputs and character string inputs e Mathematical function e Device Monitor function e NT30 620 compatible mode e Expanded capabilities for label guide character displays including multiple lines of text ON OFF switching displays numeral memory table displays and character string memory table displays System program Ver 3 0 270 All of the functions described in the Setup Manual and Reference Manual can be used The system program s version can be checked from the System Menu Relationship between system program and hardware Combining a V2 Version and Version without a V System program Ver 1 0 Appendix Suffix Hardware NT631 ST211 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 The following functions cannot be used e Analogue meter e High definition font display e Installation of system programs using memory unit e Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs e Memory link Window control from the host Multiple display of window screens Moving a window Additional data areas accessible in CS1 series PCs The CS1 series high speed 1 N NT Link Interlock function that controls touch switches numeral inputs and character string inputs Mathematical function Device Monitor function NT30 620 compatible mode Expanded capabilities for label guide character displays including multiple lines of text O
264. ode DIP SW1 1 to SW1 5 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Parity is fixed at Even Parity Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits Communications speed DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps 0 OFF 1 ON EEKANNA Godecodd 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to OFF 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to ON 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled BEBBBBEBH sws lt Q_ CTS selection DIP SW3 1 and SW3 2 Set SW3 1 to ON 1 and SW3 2 to OFF 0 Set this always to OV Synchronization DIP SW3 3 to SW3 6 Set SW3 3 SW3 5 and SW3 6 to ON 1 and SW3 4 to OFF 0 Set these to Internal Connecting to a CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit CVM1 CV series backplane mounted type CV500 LK201 A CVM1 CV series host link unit CV500 LK201 has two connectors commu nication ports 1 and 2 Either of these ports can be used for connection to an 56 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 NT631 NT631C by the RS 232C method However since the connectors at these ports are of different types a cable that matches the connector must be prepared e Communication port 1 Communication port 1 is a 25 pin connector for RS 232C use only e Communication port 2 Communication port 2 is a 9 pi
265. oduct according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the above mentioned applications Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious damage is possible or for emergency switch applications 3 Safety Precautions Safety Co
266. om one to the other When the manual data transmission is operating the content of error and remedial action are shown with selected language When the au tomatic transmission is operating it is displayed in Japanese e The continuous buzzer sounds e The RUN LED flashes If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission it is pos sible to return to the memory unit manual transmission screen by pressing the OK touch switch but in the case of other errors the status described above re mains in effect until the NT631 NT631C power is turned OFF or reset When an error occurs take remedial action by referring to the table below Probable Cause Remedial Action Mode setting error DIP switches SW1 1 to Turn the NT631 NT631C power SW1 3 are all OFF or OFF set the memory unit DIP more than one is ON switches correctly then turn the NT631 NT631C power back ON Protect setting error Writing to the data write Turn the NT631 NT631C power automatic destination has been OFF set the memory unit DIP transmission prohibited by the setting switches correctly then turn the of SW2 1 or SW2 2 NT631 NT631C power back ON 43 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the Vj Suffix Protect setting error manual transmission Probable Cause Writing to the data write destination has been prohibited by the setting of SW2 1 or SW2 2 Section 3 6 Remedial Action Perform either of the followi
267. on When wiring use crimp terminals for M3 use Tighten terminal screws with a tightening torque of 0 5 N m Note 1 Make sure to tighten screws at the connectors after cable connection 2 Always use crimp terminals for wiring at terminal blocks Examples of Applicable Terminals e For M3 5 Fork type Round type 7 mm or less D 7 mm or less O e For M3 Fork type Round type 6 2 mm or less_ 6 2 mm or less O 5 2 7 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications The serial port B connector of the NT631 NT631C has a terminal resistance set ting terminal TRM In RS 422A 485 communications a terminal resistor must be set at the device at the end of the communication cable but not at any other device The NT631 NT631C has a built in terminal resistor and whether or not the ter minal resistance is applied is set by shorting or opening the terminal resistance setting terminals TRM The terminal resistance is 120 Q When carrying out RS 422A 485 communications using serial port B short be tween terminals at the NT631 NT631C at the end of the RS 422A 485 cable Leave these terminals open at NT631 NT631C units other than the one at the end of the cable When not using RS 422A 485 communications the terminal resistance setting is ineffective Short circuit tool TRM RDA A Function terminals Terminal resistance is applied Shorted Short only at the NT
268. on with the Host method set in the system memory of the NT631 NT631C During the interval un til communication is established the system initialization screen screen No l 9000 is displayed For details refer to 6 8 Starting Operation page 158 If the system initialization screen remains on display the System Menu by pressing two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously and check the settings for the communication conditions for communication with the host Operation Start The RUN mode is established and operation starts in accordance with the screen data in the NT631 NT631C When changing the settings or checking the statuses perform the appropriate operation by displaying the System Menu For details on displaying the System Menu refer to 6 3 3 Operations with the System Menu page 129 126 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 6 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu The NT631 NT631C operates in four modes the RUN Transmit Maintenance and Expansion modes These modes are selected from the System Menu In addition the NT631 NT631C also features the System Installer mode which is used specifically for installing the system program The System Installer mode is selected by operation at the panel when the NT631 NT631C power is switched ON 6 3 1 Relationships among Modes The relationships among the System Menu each of the operation modes and the System Installer mode are indicated in th
269. on distance Max 15 m To connect two or more PTs NT AL001 units are required When using an NT AL001 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable Max 2 m e RS 422A 485 cable Total length 500 m max For a High speed NT Link 1 N RS 422A 485 Type Item Specification Communications standard EIA RS 422A 485 Connector Terminal block serial port B Number of units connected 1 1 to8 Transmission distance Max 500 m 246 Specifications Appendix A For a Memory Link RS 232C Type Communications standard EIA RS 232C Start stop synchronization Communications speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400bps Data length 7 8 bits Communications settings Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None RS CS XON XOFF Response Presence absence Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A B Number of units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 15 m Communications protocol Memory link When using NT ALO001 specification is as follows e RS 232C Max 2m e RS 422A Max total length 500 m For a Memory Link RS 422A Type Communications standard EIA RS 422A Start stop synchronization Communications speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400bps Data length 7 8 bits Communications settings Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None XON XOFF Response Presence absence Connector Terminal block Number of units connec
270. onal computer However when a bar code reader is being used it must be disconnected so that the RS 232C cable can be connected since they both use serial port A Communication Conditions The communication conditions are automatically set when the system installer and Support Tool are started Recommended Connector Cable Use the cable indicated below e CV500 CN228 length 2 m made by OMRON D SUB 9 pin male amp D SUB 25 pin male e XW2Z S001 conversion cable made by OMRON D SUB 25 pin female half pitch 14 pin male e XW2Z S002 length 2 m made by OMRON D SUB 9 pin male lt D SUB 9 pin female For details on making a connector cable refer to Appendix F Making the Cable for Connecting a PC page 263 3 3 Connecting a Printer Connecting a printer to the NT631 NT631C enables printing of hard copies of the currently displayed screen printing of screen images and by system menu operations printing of the screen display history and alarm history The following types of data can be printed depending on the printer connected to the NT631 NT631C For details refer to the pages cited e Hard copies of the screen Refer to information on printing data and checking the printer status in the N731 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Termi nal Reference Manual e Screen display history record data page 188 e Alarm history record data page 190 3 3 1 Connection Met
271. onal computer is only connected when communicating screen data between the NT631 NT631C and Support Tool Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 1 2 Functions of the NT631 NT631C The NT631 NT631C has the following features 1 2 1 Features Slim Body e High performance in a low profile body 50 mm or less in the panel e The communication cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they do not protrude from the unit When mounted in a panel of the recommended thickness page 30 Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment e The panel is provided with a high contrast monochrome EL display for NT631 ST211L EV2 an STN color LCD display with backlight for NT631C ST141LJ EV2 and a TFT color LCD high definition display for NT631C ST151 EV2 e The backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the operation site e Waterproofed equivalent to the NEMA4 standard and to IP65F The panel may not be usable in environments where it is exposed to oil for long periods 640 dots a 480 dots S Wide angle of visibility Touch Switch Operation Contrast and brightness are adjustable by touch switch operations for NT631C ST141J EV2 only Compatibility with Other PTs e There is upward compatibility between the NT631 NT631C and the following models for screen data and user programs NT11S NT20S NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31
272. onnectors 277 Calling the System Installer mode 130 Calling the System Menu 129 Cell size Touch panel 243 Changing the system settings 142 Checking communication at serial ports 207 Checking communication with a printer 210 Checking communication with the support tool 206 Checking interfaces 205 Checking screen data 192 Checking the backlight for NT631 only 199 Checking the battery voltage 204 Checking the buzzer 195 Checking the LCD screen display 198 Checking the PT setting status 187 Checking the RUN LED 196 Checking touch switches 202 Chemical resistant cover 280 Cleaning method 238 Clearing screen data 131 143 Clearing installing the system program 140 Comm A Method 147 Comm B Method 148 Comm B Select 148 Communication board 53 66 70 73 97 Communication boards 106 Communication by Using Memory Link 19 Communication condition 147 Index Communication condition settings for bar code readers 178 Communication condition settings for the host link method 148 Communication errors and their remedies 229 Communication method for communications with the host 147 Communication method settings 148 Communication methods 24 Communication port 24 Communication type 24 Communication Unit 273 Communications specifications 245 Comparison between NT631 and NT631C 5 Connecting a bar code reader 34 Connecting a printer 33 Connecting directly between RS 232C
273. ons Board Operation Manual W365 E1 CompoBus Master Con trol Unit SRM1 Operation Manual W318 E1 Programming Devices SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual C series PCs W248 E1 SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual CVM1 PCs W249 E1 SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide W332 E1 W333 E1 CX Programmer User Manual Host Link Units and Serial Communications Boards 22 SYSMAC C series Host Link Unit Operation Manual W143 E1 SYSMAC CVM1 CV series Host Link Operation Manual W205 E1 SYSMAC C200HW COM01 C200HW COM02 V1 to C200HW COM06 EV1 Serial Communications Board Operation Manual W304 E1 SECTION 2 Preparing for Connection This section describes the connection methods that are possible with the PT and the functions of the parts of PT as the required knowledge before connecting to the host and to the peripheral devices 2 1 Method for Connection to the Host 0 0 ee ee eee 24 2 2 Names and Functions of Parts 0 eee eens 27 23 Method for Connection to the Host Section 2 1 2 1 Method for Connection to the Host This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the NT631 NT631C and the relationship between the connection method and the communication method NT631 NT631C Communication Ports and Communication Methods The NT631 NT631C h
274. or rect since these models have different numbers of colors One memory unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different models In order to transmit a system program from the memory unit to the NT631 NT631C the system program must be compatible to the target PT model The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded to the memory unit besides screen data When the data in the memory unit is written into the NT631 NT631C make sure that these settings can be adapted to the NT631 NT631C used before transmission 3 5 1 Installation Method Install the memory unit NT MF261 at the expansion interface connector at the rear of the NT631 NT631C as shown in the figure below the expansion interface connector is located underneath the note label e M Mounting screws Seeaaeaeal 37 Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions Section 3 5 3 5 2 Method of Use As shown in the figure below a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 p p p p p a Factory setting is turned all to off OF OFF SW1 SW2 Note 1 Always confirm that the power to the NT631 NT631C is off before setting the DIP switches 2 Do not touch the PCB printed circuit board directly with bare hands DIP Switch
275. ors that can be used Connection CV500 CN228 9 pine25 pin 2 m XW2Z S002 9 pin9 pin 2 m Serial Port A B Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram NT631 NT631C Host side 1 m 9 O O O O Q 0 La 9 pin type 5 9 79 SECTION 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 422A 485 port of the PT 5 1 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port 0 0 0 ee eee 82 5 1 1 The Type of Host and Settings 00000000 83 5 1 2 1 1 Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232 at the Hosts 2 4 sce onde E wee en 84 5 1 3 1 N Connection between RS 422A 485 at the PT and RS 232C at the Host jo cses ics oo ipro i wee Shu ces Resa ae Ses 88 5 1 4 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals 92 5 1 5 Setting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications 94 5 2 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port 0 0 0 2 00 ee eee 95 5 2 1 Host Types and Settings 0 0 eee eee eee eee 96 5 2 2 Direct Connection between RS 422A Ports at Both Units 112 5 2 3 Direct Connection between RS 485 Ports at Both Units 115 5 2 4 1 N Connection among RS 422A Ports 0000 116 5 2 5 1 N Connection among RS 485 Ports 0 0 000005 118 5 2 6 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals 120 5 2 7 Set
276. ory alarm history re cord data are retained 131 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Reference When this function is used all of the screen data contents registered in the NT631 NT631C up to that point are cleared Check that the created screens are backed up at the Support Tool before using it e The screen data can be cleared in the System Installer mode too page 140 e The following types of data can be initialized individually Contents of numeral character string memory tables page 134 Memory switch settings page 137 Display history record data page 133 Alarm history record data page 134 Clear the screen data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Init Select Screen Data Select Yes risa Screen Dia The screen data is cleared During clear ance the message Erasing Now is dis played If No is selected the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without clearing the screen data 132 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 On completion of screen data clearance the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen After the screen data has been cleared if an attempt is made to set the NT631 NT631C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transmitted from the Support Tool or memory unit an error message will be displayed and the RUN
277. ost from the RS 232C Port This section describes the method for connecting to the host using the RS 232C port of the PT 4 1 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host 0 000 52 4 1 1 Host Types and Settings 0 0 eee eee eee 52 4 1 2 Connecting Directly between RS 232C Ports 76 51 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 4 1 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Reference The method for connecting between the RS 232C port of the PT and the RS 232C port of the host is as follows The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs By using the memory link method a connection can be made to any arbitrary RS 232 unit When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs re fer to the PC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Con nection Manual VO60 E1 L Direct Connection Between The RS 232C Ports Using an RS 232C Cable Page 106 This is the easiest connection method Depending on the host to which the con nection is to be made it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors NT631 NT631C Host LJ RS 232C cable max 15 m The CS1 series CPU cannot be connected with the 1 1 connection NT Link meth od Use the 1 N connection NT Link method instead to make the 1 1 connection For details refer to Using the NT Link 1 N Method page 69 or Using th
278. ower is supplied RUN LED Display e Lit in green while the unit is in the RUN mode e NT631 ST211LJ EV2 Monochrome EL display e Litin orange or red when e NT631C ST141LJ EV2 STN color LCD display with backlight the battery is low orange e NT631C ST1510 EV2 TFT color LCD high intensity display with backlight in the RUN mode red in other modes Depending on the model different display types are used The whole area of the screen is a touch panel which works as an input device Reference The NT631 NT631C comes in two body colors NT631 EL NT631C STN NT631C TFT Body Color NT631 ST211 EV2 NT631C ST141 EV2 NT631C ST151 EV2 Beige NT631 ST211B EV2 NT631C ST141B EV2 NT631C ST151B EV2 Black 27 Names and Functions of Parts Section 2 2 Rear View Reset switch inside the cover Used to initializes all the statuses of the NT631 NT631C However registered data such as screen data and memory switch settings retain their statuses before initialization Serial port B terminal block Connect the cable for RS 422A 485 connection to the host here Depending on the setting made at the NT631 NT631C Warning label system menu communications through RS 422A 485 are available It is not possible to use this terminal block and the serial port B connector 9 pin at the same time Expan
279. owing discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs By using the memory link method a connection can be made to any arbitrary RS 422 unit When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs re fer to the PC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or Multi Vendor Connection Manual V060 E1 L e Method in which the RS 422A ports of the NT631 NT631C and host are con nected directly by an RS 422A cable page 112 When this method is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m PT Host LI RS 422A cable max 500 m e Method in which the RS 485 ports of the NT631 NT631C and host are con nected by an RS 485 cable page 115 When this method is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m This connection method can be used only with the NT Link 1 N method standard or high speed of type RS 485 PT Host L RS 485 cable max 500 m e Method in which the RS 422A ports of multiple NT631 NT631Cs and the RS 422A port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection page 116 This connection method is used with the RS 422A type NT Link 1 N meth od standard or high speed PT Host RS 422A cable max total length 500 m e Method in which the RS 485 ports of multiple NT631 NT631Cs and the RS 485 port of the host are connected in a 1 N connection page 118 95 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5
280. peed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Setting the Host Link Method page 148 Either set the PC Setup directly from a Programming Device e g CX Program mer or transmit the PC Setup made at a Programming Device to the CPU For details on the PC Setup refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV500 CV1000 CV2000 Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams W202 E1 L 102 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Reference Setting the Front Switches Host link communication method selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A 000000 m Communication type setting DIP SW3 Set SW3 to OFF for host link communication m _ Host link default value settings DIP SW4 To effect the existing DIP switch settings set SW4 to ON To effect the values set in the PC Setup set SW4 to OFF Note For CPUs manufactured before or during June 1995 lot No 65 the existing DIP switch settings differ from the PC Setup default values as follows Existing DIP switch settings 2 400 bps 1 stop bit even parity 7 bit data length PC Setup default values 9 600 bps 2 stop bits even parity 7 bit data length For CPUs manufactured from July 1995 onward lot No JL175 the stipulated values in the DIP switch settings also are 9600 bps and 2 stop bits I O port selector switch RS 232C l RS 422A
281. peration and Their Remedies The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the NT631 NT631C and their remedies Message Address Setting Error Addressing Error exists in the Screen Correct address setting by the Support Tool The host side allocated words and bits set with the Support Tool are incorrect Set correct words and bits after checking the area used at the host side by referring to PC Memory Map in Appendix D of the Reference Manual or the Operating Manual for the PC being used Memory Table No Error Memory table No is out of limit Correct the table No by the Support Tool The memory table number set with the Support Tool is outside the range for the number of memory tables set in the system memory Either increase the number of memory tables in the System settings under PT Configuration at the Support Tool or set the memory table number again within the established range Programming Console Error Setting of Programming Console Function is inadequate It can be caused by e This PLC does not support Pro gramming Console Function e Protocol mismatch Set the PLC to NT Link e PROGRAMMING CONSOLE is connected to PLC The communication settings are incorrect Set the communication method communication port as follows when using the Programming Console function e With C series PLCs 1 1 NT Link e With CS1 series PLCs 1 N NT Link standard or high
282. ports 76 Connecting to other model PCs 18 Connecting to the Support Tool 33 Connection cable 277 Connection method 24 Contrast adjustment 181 CPU 97 CPUs 66 70 73 106 108 CPUs for connection via a host link 274 CPUs connectable with host link units or expansion com munication board 97 D Device check 195 Device Monitor function 217 Dimensions 241 Direct connection function 16 Disabling enabling System Menu display 142 Disabling enabling writing to the screen data memory 142 Display 27 Display color 242 Display device 242 Display specifications 242 Displaying and printing the display history record 188 Displaying setting the calendar and clock 185 Downloading the system program 142 E Effective display area 242 Enclosure ratings 241 Error messages 225 Errors in the system installer mode and their remedies 229 Errors occurring at start of operation 225 283 Index Errors occurring during operation 227 Errors occurring on screen data initialization and trans mission 228 Errors when using a memory unit 43 49 Expansion interface connector 28 Expansion Mode 128 External interface specifications 243 F Functional ground terminal 32 G General specifications 241 GR terminal 28 Grounding 32 241 H Host link 17 Host link method 52 96 Host link unit 53 273 T O settings 181 In the panel 4 Initializing alarm history record data
283. quipped with the Device Monitor function which can be used to change the PC s operating mode read change words in the PC s data areas and display the PC s error log of aCS1G CS1H CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E or SRM1 The Device Monitor can perform the following operations e Changing the PC s operating mode e Displaying changing the contents of words displaying changing the status of bits force setting force resetting the status of bits Registration Monitor e Listing the contents of a range of words Continuous Monitor e Displaying the error log and clearing errors Error Log This section provides an overview of the Device Monitor function and explains how to connect to the PC For more details refer to 2 16 Device Monitor Func tion in the Reference Manual Be sure that it is safe to proceed before using the Device Monitor function to per form one of the following operations from the PT Changing monitored data Switching the PC s operating mode Force setting or force resetting bits Changing PVs or SVs e The Device Monitor function can be used with Ver 3 0 and higher versions of the PT system program only e The Device Monitor functions are almost identical to the functions of the Data Access Console DAC e The Device Monitor function cannot be used with host link or memory link com munications 217 Device Monitor Function Section 6 13 6 13 1 Compatible Systems
284. r NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 Operation Manual V061 E1 LJ Support Tool NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 Operation Manual V061 E1 21 Before Operating Device or Software Manual Title SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual Section 1 6 Manual Number W262 E1 SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual W317 E1 SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual W352 E1 SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual W356 E1 SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual for CPU01 03 11 programming W130 E1 SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual for CPU21 23 31 programming W217 E1 SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide W236 E1 SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual programming W235 E1 SYSMAC C200HX HG HE ZE Installation Guide W302 E1 SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Programming Manual W303 E1 SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Z Programming Manual W322 E1 SYSMAC C1000H C2000H Operation Manual programming W140 E1 SYSMAC CQM1 Programming Manual W228 E1 SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual W363 E1 SYSMAC CVM1 CV500 CV1000 CV2000 Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams W202 E1 CS1 series CS1G H CPU E Programmable Controllers Operation Manual W339 E1 CS1 series Serial Communication Boards Units Operation Manual W336 E1 SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communicati
285. r memory switch setting screens are shown below next screen gt Sct eee si a qe i inch Fiwsarct f previous screen next screen ul previous screen next wom previous screen re next screen 4 Tire ut previous screen Memory Switch Settings A list of the memory switch settings is presented below e Start up Wait Time page 159 e Key Press Sound page 160 e Buzzer Sound page 161 e Printer Controller page 162 e Print Method page 164 e Screen Saver Movement page 165 e Screen Saver Start up Time page 166 e Hist Disp Method page 168 e Resume Function page 170 e Comm Auto return page 172 e Time out Interval page 174 e Retry Counts page 176 e Comm A Method page 147 For the bar code reader refer to page 177 e Comm B Select page 157 e Comm B Method page 147 For details on each setting refer to the pages indicated 6 9 2 Setting the Start up Wait Time The Start up Wait Time is the time lapse until the NT631 NT631C switches to the RUN mode after its power has been switched ON or after it has been reset Set this item if it takes some time for the host to start operation Nothing is displayed during the Start up Wait Time The setting range is 0 to 10 seconds The default factory setting is OOsec 159 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Set the system start up wait time by following the menu operation from the S
286. r to the following table for details on new functions supported by the V2 versions NT631 ST211 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 The following functions can not be used e Analogue meter High definition font display Connection to Mitsubishi PLCs Memory link Window control from the host Multiple display of window screens Moving a window Refer to the following table for details on new functions supported by the V2 versions Installation of system programs using memory unit is possible System program Ver 2 0 or Ver 2 1 The following functions can not be used e Installation of system programs using memory unit e High definition font display e Refer to the following table for details on new functions supported by the V2 versions The new functions supported by the V2 versions cannot be used Refer to the following table for details The system program s version can be checked from the System Menu Combining a V1 Version and V2 Version System program Ver 2 0 or Ver 2 1 Hardware NT631 ST211 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 NT631 ST211 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST151 The following functions new functions supported by the V2 cannot be used e Additional data areas accessible in CS1 series PCs e The CS1 series high speed 1 N NT Link e Interl
287. rangements for the RS 422A 485 terminal block and the RS 232C connector are as follows RS 422A 485 Terminal Block Terminal Signal direction block pin Signal name Abbreviation convertor unit RS 422 No device Request to send Request to send Receive data MN A D Receive data Send data Send data Signal ground Functional ground The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications RS 232C Connector Signal direction Signal name Abbreviation convertor unit RS 232C device Connector pin No Not used Send data Receive data anon OoO0000 oo0o0o o oON Request to send shorted to CS internally Clear to send shorted to RS internally 5 V 150 mA input for convertor unit Data set ready shorted to ER internally Data terminal ready shorted to DR internally Signal ground The hood is connected to the functional ground terminal of the RS 422A terminal block 257 Using an RS 232C RS 422A Convertor Unit Block Diagram Appendix C A diagram showing the internal blocks of the convertor unit is shown below Refer to this diagram when making cables yourself or when connecting devices with special interfaces
288. rators can be used System program Downloads the system program from the system installer transmission Downloads Upload the system program with a memory unit Function for downloading screen data to and uploading screen data from the Support Tool Function for transmitting screen data to and from the memory unit Transmission Screen data functions transmission History data uploading Function for uploading display alarm history data from PT 244 Specifications Appendix A Communications Specifications For a Host Link RS 232C Type Communications standard EIA RS 232C Start stop synchronization Communications speed 9600 19200 bps Communications settings Data length 7 bits Stop bit 2 bits Parity Even Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A B Number of units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 15 m Communications protocol C series SYSWAY 1 N When using an NT AL001 the specifications are as follows e RS 232C cable Max 2 m e RS 422A cable Total length 500 m max For a Host Link RS 422A Type Communications standard EIA RS 422A Start stop synchronization Communications speed 9600 19200 bps Communications settings Data length 7 bits Stop bit 2 bits Parity Even Connector Terminal Block serial port B Number of units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 500 m Communications protocol C series SYSWAY 1
289. re connecting or dis connecting a memory unit After mounting a memory unit be sure to tighten its two screws 2 During data transmission do not turn off the power supply to the NT631 NT631C or reset it 3 Do not touch the PCB printed circuit board with bare hands Reference When a memory unit is mounted the NT631 NT631C cannot be set to the op erating status On completion of data transmission with a memory unit always disconnect the memory unit from the NT631 NT631C before starting NT631 NT631C operation Memory units NT MF261 can be used in common for the following PT mod els NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with and without VLI One memory unit can store screen data for up to two PTs of different models However since the data compatibility is not complete between NT31 NT31C and NT631 NT631C the data of NT631 cannot be used in NT31C without putting it through a conver sion the data must be converted using the Support Tool Note also that although there is data compatibility between the NT31 and NT31C and between the NT631 and NT631C the display may not be correct since these models have different numbers of colors The screen data for NT631 NT631C PTs with system program Ver 2 or later cannot be used with PTs with system program earlier than Ver 2 The statuses of memory switch settings and system settings can be recorded to the memory unit besides screen data When the data in the memory unit is w
290. rec ommended parts indicated in the table below When using the memory link method however use a connector that matches with the RS 422A port at the CPU CP side Some units come supplied with one connector and connector hood Check the required parts and prepare them in advance Remarks Delivered with the following units CS1 series CS1G H F C series C200HS Connector XM2A 0901 opin type C200HX HG HE Z E Made by OMRON Delivered with the following units CVM1 CV series CPU unit CV500 LK201 Delivered with the following units cok C series C200HS 9 pin type C200HX HG HE Z E XM2S 0911 Made by 3 f OMRON Delivered with the following Connector units hood CVM1 CV series CPU unit CV500 LK201 9 pin type Delivered with the following XM2S 0911 E M units ayer CS1 series CS1G H Tachii Electric Cable TKVVBS4P 03 Wire Co Ltd 1 25 N3A Japan Solderless R dJed able size Crimp fork type 1 Terminal MFG ecomMeEncEd CaAVIe SIze AWG22 to 18 S terminals Y1 25 3 5L Molex Inc 0 3 to 0 75 mm fork type 1 1 Crimp terminals of common use for M3 and M3 5 120 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 The terminal screws of the NT631 NT631C are M3 5 specification When wiring use crimp terminals for M3 5 use Tighten terminal screws with a tightening torque of 0 8 N m The terminal screws of the RS 422A adaptor CPM1 CIF11 are M3 specifica ti
291. ritten into the NT631 NT631C make sure that these settings can be adapted to the NT631 NT631C used before transmission 3 6 1 Installation Method Install the memory unit NT MF261 at the expansion interface connector at the rear of the NT631 NT631C as shown in the figure below The expansion inter face connector is located underneath the note label ik E Wi e W WwW W Mounting screws Seeeeeeae 45 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the Vj Suffix Section 3 6 3 6 2 Method of Use As shown in the figure below a memory unit has two sets of four DIP switches and the operation is determined by the DIP switches that are set at startup 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 p p p pe Factory setting is turned all to off Swi Sw2 Note 1 Always confirm that the power to the NT631 NT631C is off before setting the DIP switches 2 Do not touch the PCB printed circuit board directly with bare hands DIP Switch Functions The functions of the DIP switches on the memory unit are indicated in the table below SW1 Function Automatic transmission writing from the memory Not executed unit to the PT Executed Automatic transmission writing from the PT to the Not executed memory unit Executed Manual transmission Direction of transmission and Not executed bank used
292. rk in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 NAK received Check the settings for allocated words and bits If noise is a possible factor distance the cable from sources of noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line If using the equipment in a location subject to a lot of noise use a cable with a high degree of protection against noise for the transmission route Also make the cable as short as possible Undefined Command Error The host is not supported Check the PC model used for the host Instruction level 3 is not effective Check that the instruction level setting for the host is level 1 2 3 Data Over Flow Error Communication command from the host is too long With memory link Set flow control method in the host Increase transmission interval Command transmission to the host is not possible Check the communication cable Check the control method at the PT and the host Increase the communication on speed when it to slow 7 3 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT631 NT631C is al ways used in its optimum condition Spare PT N WARNING Do not attempt to take the unit apart and do not touch any inter nal parts while the power is being supplied Doing either of these may result in electrical shock S It is advisable to have a spare NT631 NT631C available
293. ro grammer For details on the CPU bus unit settings refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV series Host Link Unit Operation Manual W205 E1 101 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Setting the Front Switches Unit SW3 SW4 Set these switches to 0 Communications port 1 RS 232C Communications port 2 RS 232C RS 422A I O port selector switch RS 232C T I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 422A RS 422A nae ay Communication condition setting DIP SW1 Set this switch to OFF Communication is executed in accordance with the CPU bus unit system settings made at the PC The initial values for the system settings are as follows Communications speed 9 600 bps Parity Even Xon Xoff control Not executed Communication method Full duplex Stop bits 2 stop bits Data length 7 bits Terminator setting selector switch Set this to ON Connecting to a CPU Unit CVM1 CV series EV_ CPUs e CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 e CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 PC Setup When connecting to a CVM1 CV series CPU set the following communication conditions for the PC Setup Item Setting at Host Communications speed Set the same speed as for the NT631 NT631C 1 Stop bit 2 stop bits Parity Even Data length ASCII 7 bits Unit 00 1 Set the host link communications s
294. round loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 422A cable The relay terminal block is not included in this figure Insert the relay terminal block so as to achieve the wiring configuration shown below NT631 NT631C Host RS 485 Wiring When Connecting a CS1 series CS1G H Serial Communication Board C Series C200HX HG HE Z E Communication Board or CQM1H Serial Communications Board Applicable units CS1G CPU42 E V1 V1 CS1G CPU44 E V1 V1 CS1H CPU63 E V1 CS1H CPU64 E V1 V1 V1 V1 CS1H CPU65 E V CS1H CPU67 E V C200HE CPU32 Z E C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HG CPU33 Z E C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU53 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z E C200HX CPU44 Z E 119 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 C200HX CPU54 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU65 ZE C200HX CPU85 ZE CQM1H CPU51 CQM1H CPU61 Ol RDA NT631 NT631C side PLC side 1 6 O TRM Abbreviation Se RDB O d IDE Cg J sos eaa Sa RSA Oo N RSB D IE A ae La OJ lt zv a 9 pin type 5 i lt I DC In order to avoid an FG ground loop do not connect the functional ground of the NT631 NT631C to the shielding of the RS 485A cable 5 2 6 Recommended Connectors Cables and Crimp Terminals Connectors and Cables Recommended for RS 422A 485 When making an RS 422A 485 connecting cable as far as possible use the
295. rs and settings to be made depending on the unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below CPM2A CPM2C CQM1H or SRM1 Peripheral port connection Writing Value Settings 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communication conditions set by the contents of DM 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps 0000 Unit 00 C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H other than the CPU11 or SRM1 Built in RS 232C port connection Writing Value Settings 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communication conditions set by the contents of DM 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps 0000 Unit 00 C200HX HG HE Z E Serial Communications Board port A CQM1H Serial Communications Board port 1 Writing Value Settings 0001 Host link mode no CTS control Communication conditions set by the contents of DM 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity communications speed 19200 bps 0000 Unit 00 61 Connecting to the RS 232C Port at the Host Section 4 1 62 When using port B of the communication board o
296. s of the NT631 NT631C immediately before its operation is stopped can be stored while operation is stopped or while the power is off and then displayed on the screen again when operation is restarted Screen saver function This function serves to extend the service life of the backlight and EL and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen Clock function The time can be displayed in accordance with the internal clock data Programming Console function When the NT631 NT631C is connected to a C series CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H or C200HX HG HE Z E pro grammable controller in an NT link 1 1 connection and also is connected to CS1 series CS1G CS1H in an NT link 1 N connec tion operations equivalent to those of a Programming Console C200H PR027 E are possible Device Monitor function When the PT is connected to a PC in a 1 1 NT Link or 1 N NT Link the PT can be used for operations such as changing the PC s operating mode displaying or changing the PVs of words or reading the error log System program install function The system program of the NT631 NT631C can be changed by using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool NT ZJ3AT1 ZJCAT EV2 It can also be installed by using a memory unit NT MF261 Screen display history function alarm history function The screen display history function records the time at which specific screens are displayed and the number of times they are displayed The alarm hi
297. sary 97 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 Item Setting at Host I O port RS 422A Communications speed Set the same speed as for the NT631 NT631C 1 Transfer code ASCIl 7 data bits 2 stop bits Parity Even 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 Unit 00 1 Set the host link communications speed at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the Comm Speed memory switch at the NT631 NT631C For details refer to Setting the Host Link Method page 148 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT631 NT631C in a single host link The setting methods for each type of unit are described in the following Connecting to a C Series Host Link Unit C200H C200HS C200HE Z E C200HG Z E C200HX Z E Backplane mounting type C200H LK201 V1 Setting the Front Switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following Unit SW1 SW2 Set these switches to 0 Instruction level parity and transfer code SW4 Set this switch to 2 Communications speed SW3 Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps Terminator setting selector switch Set this switch to ON eee ON 1 to N OFF 1 to 1 1 to N protocol selection selector switch Set this switch to 1 to
298. set the setting in the Memory Switch menu of the Maintenance mode Unable to erase Screen Data Hardware fault or flash memory memory for storing the system program has reached its life If the same message is displayed on repeating screen data deletion several times contact your OMRON service center 7 2 5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies This section describes the errors relating to communication that can occur dur ing operation and their remedies Operation When a Communication Error Occurs When a communication error occurs the error message is displayed at the NT631 NT631C and the buzzer sounds provided the setting made for Buzzer Sound in the System Menu is other than OFF An error message is displayed provided the setting for the Comm Auto Return memory switch is not ON note that some error messages are displayed even if the setting is ON When an error message is displayed press the OK touch switch displayed on the screen The NT631 NT631C will return to the screen that was displayed be fore the error occurred and operation will restart Operation When Communication Errors Occur Display of Communication Errors For communication errors the name of the port at which the error occurred the error classification Send or receive error the details of the error the probable cause and the remedy are displayed as shown below 229 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2
299. setting of the screen data check is effective only on this menu Exiting from this screen data check menu resets the settings to the default all the settings are set to OFF Operations On The SCREEN DATA CHECK Screen The function shown below can be set on the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen Use this function as required when displaying complex screens on which multi ple display elements have been registered overlapping each other J a Equivalent to 2 touch switches 14 4 mm NT631 14 4mm NT631C 13 2 mm J c b Equivalent to 2 touch switches 14 4 mm NT631 14 4 mm NT631C 13 2 mm a Display the previous display element on the upper most portion of the screen in the order in which the display elements were registered ex cluding fixed display elements b Display the next display element on the upper most portion of the screen in the order in which the display elements were registered excluding fixed display elements c Return to the screen on which screens are specified 193 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Displaying the SCREEN Display the SCREEN DATA CHECK screen by following the menu operation DATA CHECK Screen from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 bs cJ Eo Disp k of Lam Torch Si Hp Diapit af hart Table Ho Diop oof image Librace fo Diepte ol Broken Cire Frew 4 HT PUG HL Dt T Sethings sy Alt Deg oar Hi emir Pliage Sia bet bow LU Setti
300. sion interface connector under the label When using an expansion interface unit such as a memory unit peel off the label and connect it here GR terminal Grounding terminal to prevent malfunction due to noise a Power input terminals Connect the power to the NT631 NT631C at these terminals Serial port A connector Connect the cable for connection to the host or Support Tool here A bar code reader can also be connected here This is a 9 pin connector for RS 232C use only Battery cover The battery is secured underneath this cover Serial port B connector Connect the cable for RS 232C connection to the host here Depending on the setting made at the NT631 NT631C system menu communications through RS 232C are available This is a 9 pin connector for RS 232C use only It is not possible to use this connector and the serial port B terminal block at the same time Printer connector Connect the printer cable here Output conforms to Centronics specifications Note Confirm system safety before turning the power ON OFF or resetting 28 SECTION 3 Hardware Settings and Connections This section describes the settings of the NT631 NT631C and methods for connection to peripheral devices For details on the method for connection to the host refer to Section 4 Connecting to the Host from the RS 232C Port or Sec tion 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A 485 Port Sal Snstallationy sais somtinc
301. story function records the time at which specific bits at the host are turned ON and the number of times they are turned ON Trend graph logging function and background function Changes in the contents of numeral memory tables displayed in trend graphs can be recorded logging function Also the record can be maintained even when the trend graph is not displayed background function Mathematical function This function allows calculations to be executed continuously during PT operation when mathematical table have been set in screen data Arithmetic operations bit operations logic operations and comparison operations can be performed Operations with up to 5 terms are possible Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 1 2 6 Displays Characters fixed display Bar graph Fixed Displays 10 The NT631 NT631C can display various kinds of elements such as characters numeric values graphs lamps and touch switches on a screen The screen data displayed by the NT631 NT631C are created by using the Support Tool at a personal computer EEE I lt Touch switches Kechins nase MTRSL S7151 lt 4 Characters nica 4 j in lt character string display Numeric values i 29 numeral display lt Lamps Characters and various graphics circles circular arcs sectors polylines poly gons and rectangles whose display does not have to be changed and mark data image da
302. t for Serial port A connector also used screen data transfer for screen data transfer 9 pin Serial port B connector for host communications only 9 pin RS 422A 485 interface NT620S NT620C None Terminal block serial port B memory NT625C Terminal block DIP switch _ SWitch selectable between RS232C selectable between RS232C and and RS 4a20185 RS 422A 485 Replacement backlight NT620C CFL01 NT620C NT631C CFL01 for ST151 NT610C CFL02 NT625C NT631C CFL02 for ST141 NT631 NT631C system program data NT620 ZS3AT EV1 EMV1 The system installer and system pro including system installer gram data are supplied with the Sup port Tool Functions of the NT631 NT631C High speed 1 N NT Link NT620S NT620C NT625C Not possible Section 1 2 NT631 NT631C Possible Memory Link System program Exclusive use by Memory Link Same as OMRON connection Screen data Shared with OMRON connection Exclusive use by Memory Link LCD contrast adjustment By acontrol on the rear of the unit By touch panel operation Possible in the NT631 ST141 only Backlight brightness adjustment Not possible By touch panel operation Possible in the NT631 ST141 only Number of user registered screens Maximum of 2000 Maximum of 3999 Screen data capacity User program memory NT620S 512 KB NT620C NT625C 1 MB 1 MB Numeral strin
303. t the PT and host sides are indicated below Make the settings in accordance with the communica tion method that can be used with the PC to be connected and the conditions at the operation site When using an RS 232C 422A convertor unit NT ALO01 with the host link or NT link 1 1 communication method RS 485 cannot be used The connection must be made with RS 232C or RS 422A 1 4 Communication with the Host The NT631 NT631C is connected to the host by one of the following commu nication methods The following communications can be used to connect an OMRON PC e Host Link e 1 1 NT Link e 1 N NT Link standard or high speed The following communications can be used to connect another companies PC or FA computer e Communications protocol supported by the other company s PC e Memory link In all of these communication methods that can be used with NT631 NT631C data communication with host is by direct connection Memory link is however a quasi direct connection In the following the host link and NT link that carry out the direct connection will be discussed Memory link will be explained in 1 5 Communications Using Memory Links 1 4 1 Direct Connection Function 16 With the NT631 NT631C the bits and words referring to data required for dis play and those for storing input data can be allocated to any part of the PC memory area Communication with the Host Section 1 4 Features of the Direct Connec
304. ta and library data that has already been registered can be writ ten directly onto the screen Circle Arc Sector Polyline Polygon Rectangle A continuous straight line with up to 256 points can be drawn A polygon with up to 255 vertices can be drawn Marks are graphics comprising 16 by 16 dots that can be used as characters They can be used as custom characters within character strings Image data are graphics comprising any required area of dots They are regis tered in advance and as many as required can be displayed at any position on the screen Windows bit map BMP data can be used for images There is a two color mode in which the display color and background color of the image are specified when it is registered in a screen and an eight color mode in which colors are assigned to the image in advance Since image data is composed of dots it requires a large data size but offers great powers of expression Library data are combinations of fixed display graphics registered as a single graphic They are registered in advance and as many as required can be dis played at any position on the screen Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 Since it is generated by combining graphics library data has a small data size Mark Image data Library data ef Lamps These are graphics whose display status changes in accordance with the states of bits at the host Squares circles sectors an
305. tches are set to ON e In the following case a protect setting error occurs Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for SW2 1 or SW2 2 e In the following cases a data transmission error occurs e An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to PT system program area e An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT screen data area e For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors refer to Errors When Using a Memory Unit page 43 Writing Screen Data to a In this mode system program or the screen data in the NT631 NT631C is forci Memory Unit Using _ bly written to the memory unit irrespective of the setting status of the Automatic Transmission NT631 NT631C PT to Memory Unit i ee oe This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation is not possible or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the opera tion site is using the system Reference When screen data is written to the memory unit the data that has been stored in the specified area up until that point is lost if the data is written into only one Bank the other Bank will not be affected Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the NT631 NT631C to the memory unit by automatic transmission 1 2 3 1 Check that the power supply to the NT631 NT631C is OFF then set the DIP switches o
306. ted 1 1 Transmission distance Max 500 m Communications protocol Memory link For a Bar Code Reader Communications standard EIA RS 232C Start stop synchronization Communications speed 4 800 9600 19200 bps Data length 7 8 bits Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control RS CS Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female serial port A Communications settings Number of units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 15 m Communications protocol Non protocol mode Data format STX Data 0 to 40 bytes 247 302 5 11 91 Appendix B Dimensions 315 12 40 gt Units mm inch 250 9 84 237 5 9 35 me 7 5 0 30 54 2 13 anl With memory unit installed NT MF261 zs ow 74 2 91 249 Dimensions Appendix B Mounting Dimensions Mounting panel Mounting fixture A A 140 5 51 259 10 20 __y Yy 15 61 5 5 0 61 T 17 5 0 30 240 9 45 zj 34 1 34 min lt gt 38 1 5 max Units mm inch 324 12 76 250 Dimensions Appendix B Cable Connection Dimensions with NT MF261 35 1 38 96 3 78 lt gt 91 3 58 31 1 22 75 2 95 118 4 65 gt Units mm inch 251 Appendix C Using
307. the I O check are not notified to the host e The check cannot be performed until the touch switch at the top right corner is displayed in reverse video for NT631 or displayed in yellow NT631C Start the check after the status of the touch switch at the top right corner has changed 203 Section 6 11 System Maintenance Check the voltage of the NT631 NT631C s built in battery by following the menu Checking the Battery Voltage operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select Device Check aM huc The voltage is within the normal range or The voltage is lowered is displayed The voltae ia within the romal renee After confirming the result of the check press Quit The NT631 NT631C returns to the DEVICE CHECK MENU screen 204 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Note When The voltage is lowered is displayed replace the built in battery immedi ately For details on the replacement method refer to 7 3 1 Replacing the Bat tery page 237 6 11 8 Checking Interfaces The NT631 NT631C allows the following communication functions to be checked e Communication with the Support Tool Page 205 e Communication at serial ports Page 207 e Communication with printers Page 210 205 System Maintenance Section 6 14 Checking _ Check communication with the Support Tool by following the menu operation Comm
308. the NT link 1 1 method 152 Setting the NT link 1 N method 152 Setting the Print Method 164 Setting the Printer Controller 162 Setting the resume function 170 Setting the retry count 176 Setting the screen saver start up time 166 Setting the Start up Wait Time 159 Setting the terminal resistance 94 121 Setting the time out interval 174 Shock resistance operating 241 Special features 243 Starting operation 158 Starting the NT31 NT31C 126 Storage ambient temperature 241 Supplemental functions to V2 5 Support Tool 277 Switching from the System Menu to the RUN mode 131 Switching to the RUN mode 158 System configuration 15 System Menu 127 T Terminal resistance setting terminals 94 Transmit Mode 127 Transmitting the screen data 144 Transporting and Storing the NT631 NT631C 259 U Usable systems programming console function 212 Using a Memory Unit NT631 NT631C with V1 36 Using an RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit 253 V Vibration resistance operating 241 View angle 242 W Warning label 28 Waterproof 4 Weight 241 285
309. the NT631 NT631C displays an error message find the corresponding symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy indicated in the table For details of the error messages displayed when using memory unit and correc tive action to take for them refer to 3 5 Using a Memory Unit V_ Versions in page 36 or 3 6 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the V_ Suffix in page 44 7 2 1 Errors Occurring at Start of Operation and Their Remedies The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power to the NT631 NT631C is turned ON and when operation starts and their remedies Message No Comm Protocol Set the comm Protocol by MAINTENANCE MODE No communication protocol has been set Communication protocol and screen data type are mismatched Using the memory switches set the communication method to be used for communication with the host 6 7 Setting Conditions for Communications with Host by Using Memory Switches page 147 Screen Data Error Screen Data corrupted Initialize Screen Memory and download Screen Data again The power was switched OFF during screen data initialization checking or transmission Transmission of screen data was interrupted Illegal data has been written to the screen data memory Initialize the screen data memory by operation at the System Menu then re transmit the screen data 6 4 1 Clearing Screen Data page 131 If the
310. the currently running production line e The area to control and notify the NT631 NT631C statuses including display screens display no display status and buzzer output can be freely allocated to any part of the PC data area This means that the PC status can be read and controlled just by reading this area at the PC side without preparing a special communication program The direct connection function allows the NT631 NT631C to directly read and write almost all bits and words in the PC and to automatically change the NT631 NT631C screen display This function can reduce the load on the PC so that its program development efficiency is improved The host is connected to a PT in a 1 1 connection and the words and bits of the host are read and displayed by host link communication This method can be used for connection to the majority of PC types NT link is a method for high speed communication with a PC using the direct connection function The PCs that can be connected with the NT link are as fol lows CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CS1G CS1H E V1 CVM1 CV series PC EV1 or later version SRM1 Besides the 1 1 NT link method in which one PC is connected to one PT the NT631 NT631C can also use the 1 N connection NT link method which allows a maximum of eight PTs to be connected to one PC port PCs that can be connected with the 1 N connection NT Link method are as fol lows CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z E CS1G
311. the memory tables can be initialized just by switching the NT631 NT631C power off and back on again or by resetting the NT631 NT631C page 170 e The bit memory table merely reflects the statuses of bits at the host and there fore cannot be initialized 137 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Initialize the memory tables by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 f Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Init Select Memory Table Select Yes lize Ploy Tables The memory tables are initialized During ini tialization the message Initializing is dis played If No is selected the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the memory tables On completion of memory table initialization the message Finished is displayed and the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 6 4 6 Initializing the Memory Switches Initialization returns all the memory switches of the NT631 NT631C to their sta tus on shipment 138 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 Initialize the memory switches by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Init Select Memory Switch Select Yes The memory tables are initialized During ini tialization the message Initializing is dis played If No is
312. the records must be periodically initialized If Screen Use Ring Buffer is checked when the maxi mum number of records is reached the oldest record is deleted and the newest data is recorded Reference The NT631 NT631C also allows the alarm history record data to be initialized by controlling the PT status control area from the host For details refer to 2 2 1 PT Status Control Area in the Reference Manual Initialize the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Init Select Alarm History Select Yes The alarm history record data is initialized During initialization the message Initializing is displayed 135 Memory Initialization Section 6 4 If No is selected the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen without initializing the alarm history record data On completion of alarm history record data initialization the message Finished is displayed and the NT631 NT631C returns to the MEMORY INIT MENU screen 6 4 4 Initializing the Recipe Tables You can initialize the recipe tables i e all the recipe data edited in the NT631 NT631C Here initializing the recipe tables means to restore the bat tery backup memory recipe data memory to the values in flash memory at that time If after downloading from the Support Tool you do not upload th
313. the shielding 89 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connection between The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay termi NT631 NT631C Units nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below RS 422A NT631 NT631C Host NT ALOO1 RS 422A RDA NT631 NT631C side NT631 NT631C side Short circuit tool Abbreviation RS 422A RS 422A SDA 1485 1485 terminal terminal SDB block block Shielding A wire Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631 NT631C at the end of the RS 422A cable x marked in the above figure using the short circuit tool supplied with the NT631 NT631C In order to avoid an FG ground loop make the connection between the connec tor hood and the shielding at one side only 90 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 Connection between NT631 NT631C Units RS 485 The relay terminal board is not included in the figure below Insert a relay termi nal board so as to achieve the wiring configuration indicated below NT631 NT631C Host E NT631 NT631C side NT631 NT631C side Short circuit tool RS 422A RDB RS 422A RDB 1485 terminal x terminal Shielding wire 24V DC L 24V DC Short TRM and RDA terminals of the NT631
314. the window need only be opened when input is required the screen can be used efficiently Numeral character string setting function Numeric keys and character keys can be assigned to touch switches so that numeric values and character strings can be input at the operation site The input data is written to numeral character string memory tables and also sent to the host It is also possible to disable input by control from the host Recipe function Several words of numeric data can be edited at the PT Unit and written to or read from the host in one operation Input from a bar code reader Data read with a bar code reader can be input to a character string input field Functions relating to communication Communications with the host The NT631 NT631C can communicate with the host by four methods host link 1 1 NT link 1 N NT link standard or high speed and Memory link Data can be read from the host and data input by means of touch switches and numer al character string settings can be sent to the host It is also possible to connect with other model PCs Functions relating to the system System menu System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting from system menus displayed on the screen Creation of screen data Screen data created using the Support Tool at a personal computer can be transferred and stored in the built in screen data memory Resume function The status and memory table content
315. they become effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or executing the STUP command In the following table the relevant word addresses in the allocation DM area and settings are shown Allocation DM area writing Port 2 Value Settings NT Link 1 N mode Communications baud rate high speed The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 For example when connecting PTs with model numbers 3 4 5 and 6 to port 2 set the value 8200 Hex to DM32010 000A Hex to DM32011 and 0006 Hex to DM32016 111 Connecting to the Host s RS 422A 485 Port Section 5 2 When using the Memory With the memory link method the connection can be made to a personal com Link Method puter and an FA computer with RS 422A When connecting to the host with the memory link method it is necessary to create a program for the memory link at the host side The following are the communication conditions that can be used with the memory link method For the host a personal computer an FA computer etc its setting should be compatible to one of the communication conditions listed in the following table Set the same communication conditions at the NT631 NT631C by the memory switch page 155 Item Setting at Host Input Output board RS 422A Communication speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Data bits length 7 bits
316. ting Item Function Setting Op tions Unit No for NT Link 1 N only Comm Speed Set the unit number of the NT631 NT631C Page 152 Standard or high speed Sets the communications speed for communications with the host Setting The Conditions for Communications with The Memory Link Meth od Setting Item Function Setting Op tions Data bits Set the data bits length 7 8 bits Stop bits Set the stop bits length 1 2 bits Parity Set the parity None even odd Comm Speed Set the communications speed for communications with the host 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Flow control Set the flow control and its meth od None RS CS XON XOFF Response Set whether the response is car ried out for normal process of communication command or not Yes No Page 155 The combinations of communication methods that can be set with the NT631 NT631C are indicated in the table below Combinations other than these listed below cannot be set when using a system for multi venders refer to the PC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Connection Manual V060 E1 L Possible Combinations of Communication Method Settings Serial port A NT Link NT Link Bar code Memory 1 1 1 N reader Link Serial port B Host Link None Host Link NT Link 1 1
317. ting in the System Installer mode is set to Disabled In the System Installer mode set Screen Memory Protect to Enabled page 143 Screen Memory Protect has been set to Disabled because the PT power supply was turned OFF during deletion of screen data Do not turn the PT power OFF during deletion of screen data In the System Installer mode first change the setting for Screen Memory Protect to Enabled then repeat the screen data delete operation pages 143 and 143 Cannot input numeric values The upper lower max min limit check for numeric value input is in effect Check the screen data s upper lower max min limit check setting for numeric value input and correct it if necessary Refer to 2 12 Inputting Numeric Values in the Reference Manual for details The display is too faint The contrast is too high Reduce the contrast page 181 Cannot input numeric values character strings Bit 5 of the PT status control area numeral character string input is set to 1 ON Set bit 5 to 0 OFF Refer to 2 2 1 PT Status Control Area Host lt gt PT in the Reference Manual for details The interlock function is set for the input field and the controlling interlock bit is OFF Inputs are prohibited in input fields when the corresponding interlock bit is OFF Check the status of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON Window screen does not open Bit 6 of the PT stat
318. ting the Terminal Resistance for RS 422A 485 Communications 121 81 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port Section 5 1 5 1 Connecting to the Host s RS 232C Port The methods for connecting the RS 422A 485 port of the NT631 NT631C and the RS 232C port of the host are described here There are the following meth ods The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON PCs By using the memory link method a connection can be made to any arbitrary RS 232 unit When making a connection to a host other than OMRON PCs re fer to the PC Connection Manual V042 E1 L or NT31 631 Multi Vendor Con nection Manual VO60 E1 L e Method in which the RS 422A port of the NT631 NT631C and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 1 connection via an RS 232C RS 422A convertor unit page 84 When this method is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m PT RS 232C RS 422A Host convertor unit RS 422A cable RS 232C max 500 m cable max 2 m e Method in which the RS 485 port of the NT631 NT631C and the RS 232C port of the host are connected in a 1 1 connection via an RS 232C RS 422A con vertor unit page 84 When this method is used the cable length can be extended up to 500 m This connection method can be used only with the NT Link 1 N method of type RS 485 PT RS 232C RS 422A ___ Host convertor unit RS 485 cable RS 232C max 500
319. ting the old battery s connector However the battery can be re placed while the NT631 NT631C power is on and in this case there is no time restriction 5 Close the battery cover making sure that the cable is not trapped 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning Cleaning Method Inspection Method 238 Note Clean and inspect the NT631 NT631C regularly to ensure that it is always used in its optimum condition If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see Clean the screen from time to time as follows e In daily cleaning wipe the display with a soft dry cloth If the soiling is particular ly heavy attempting to remove it by wiping with a dry cloth may damage the front sheet of the unit In this case wipe with a damp cloth e If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth wet the cloth with diluted neu tral detergent 2 wring it out well and wipe the display with it e f rubber or vinyl products tape etc are left stuck to the display for long peri ods they will cause staining If such items are stuck to the display remove them during cleaning Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners or chemical dusters In normal environments inspect the NT631 NT631C at intervals of between 6 months and a year In environments that are extremely hot and humid or very dusty environments shorten the inspection interval Items Required for The Inspection Prepare the following items before starting the
320. tion Function 1 4 2 Host Link 1 4 3 NT Link The NT631 NT631C can directly write to and read from such allocated bits and words to change the display status of the elements on the PT screen control the PT operating status and notify statuses to the host This function which directly reads and writes the statuses of words and bits with out using a PC program is called the direct connection function The words and bits allocated for direct connection are called the allocated words and allocated bits The direct connection function allows the data to be displayed at the NT631 NT631C to be read from the memory area in the PC and written to memory tables in the NT631 NT631C Also the data input at the NT631 NT631C can be written to the memory area in the PC The NT631 NT631C screen can be changed in accordance with statuses in the PC memory area and the NT631 NT631C s status data can be written to the PC s memory area NT631 NT631C DM area I O relay area ile oe Auxiliary relay area Timers counters The direct connection function has the following features e The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction informa tion and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any area of the PC memory e Since the NT631 NT631C can directly refer to PC bit and word data without using the program at the PC it can be connected to the PC without changing the PC program which controls
321. to minimize system downtime in the event of an NT631 NT631C failure or if the screen display be comes difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit 231 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Section 7 3 Backlight for NT631C When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read only easily replace the backlight The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the NT631 NT631C while it is mounted in an operation panel Replaceable Backlight Model NT631C CFLO1 for NT631C ST151LJ EV2 NT631C CFLO2 for NT631C ST141L EV2 Guide to Backlight Replacement Use the following as a guide to backlight replacement NT631C ST141LJ EV2 Approx 25 000 hours NT631C ST151LJ EV2 Approx 30 000 hours The life of the backlight varies particularly in accordance with the temperature in the environment in which it is used It should be replaced when it becomes dim and the screen becomes hard to read Notes on Replacing the Pay attention to the following points when replacing the backlight Backlight l g e Carry out the replacement work in a location where there is no danger that dust or foreign bodies will enter the unit and where no water will drip onto it Do not touch the printed circuit boards of the NT631 NT631C with your bare hands Also discharge the static electricity from your body before starting the work e Do not carry the backlight unit by holding onl
322. ts disconnected in 2 and tighten the screws at a torque of 0 4 Nem 236 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Section 7 3 Turn the power on and check that the RUN LED is not flashing and that no buzzer is sounding If the RUN LED flashes at 1 sec intervals and a buzzer sounds intermittently the touch panel cable is disconnected Follow the above steps from 1 and check the lock status of the connector 11 Before starting normal operation confirm that the following tests can be executed correctly by using the I O check in the Maintenance menu Also perform a communication test with the host e Touch switch e Backlight 12 On confirming that all the tests in 11 can be executed normally start opera tion 7 3 1 Replacing the Battery Procedure 1 2 3 Reference The NT631 NT631C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents The battery life is about 5 years if the NT631 NT631C is used in a location where the ambient temperature is 25 C If the temperature at the location of use is higher than this the battery life will be shorter Change the battery at suitable intervals in accordance with the operating environment of the NT631 NT631C It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced im mediately when replacement becomes necessary Battery Type 3G2A9 BAT08 for both NT631 and NT631C Guide to Replacement Replace the battery in the following cases The battery must be replaced wit
323. ttery page 237 and 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables page 137 Since ON is set for the resume function the initial values of the screen data memory are not written to the memory tables Execute memory table initialization 6 4 5 Initializing the Memory Tables page 137 If the resume function does not need to be used use the NT631 NT631C with the resume function OFF 6 9 10 Setting the Resume Function page 170 The numeral memory table is specified as the destination for a mathematical table s results Calculations are executed continuously while the PT is operating and the calculation results are automatically written to the memory table Specify another numeral memory table or a word in the host 223 Troubleshooting Section 7 1 NT631 NT631C Symptoms Updating of numeric values and text is delayed Cause Malfunction due to external noise Remedy Carry out grounding work in accordance with the conditions by referring to 3 1 4 Grounding page 32 There are too many numeral text displays on the displayed screen Reduce the number of numeral text displays on the screen for which updating is delayed The cycle time is extended due to heavy processing at the host Shorten the host cycle time In an RS 422A 485 connection there is illegal branching or an erroneous terminator setting Wire correctly by referring to Section 5 Connecting to the Host from the RS 422A
324. ttings directly from a Programming Device e g CX Programmer in accordance with the host model and port Host Model Word Writing Value Setting RS 232C port of C200HS C200HX HG HE Z E CPM2A DM6645 CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H SRM1 F Port A of C200HX HG HE Z E Biieaee ao link Port 1 of CQM1H 2 Port B of C200HX HG HE Z E 1 DM6550 CPM1 DM6650 1 RS 232C port of the Communication Board 2 RS 232C port of the Serial Communications Board For details on operations relating to the PC Setup area refer to the manual for the PC which is used Connecting to a CPM2C The CPM2C PCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS1 series PCs The CPM2C s communication port handles both RS 232C and peripheral port connections which are divided internally Therefore when using the CPM2C it is necessary to select RS 232C or peripheral port connections according to the kind of cable and port on the cable used as shown in the fol lowing table Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more details Port connecting to PT PC Setup RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CPM2C CN111 Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CPM2C CN111 Peripheral port settings RS 232C port D Sub 9 pin of CS1W CN118 Built in RS 232C port settings Peripheral port of CS1W CN114 Peripheral port settings Peripheral port CPM2C CN111 CPM2C CS1W CN118 CPM2C CS1W CN114 CPM2C ll ee rh RS
325. tun bb bins ob beeen SB a beds Ow ele odoin Shs 30 3 1 1 Installation Environment 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 30 3 1 2 Installation in the Operation Panel 000 30 3 1 3 Power Supply Connection 00 0 0 ce eee eee eee 31 3 1 4 Grounding 43 2 ieee a See ah eGo aie be 32 3 2 Connecting to the Support Tool 00 0 2 eee eee 33 3 3 Conn ctings a Printers cece sad eriste k Cakes weds REELI ae keene pes 33 3 3 1 Connection Method 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 33 3 4 Connecting a Bar Code Reader 0 00 2 34 3 4 1 Connection Method ee e ee eee 34 3 4 2 Setting a Bar Code Reader 0 0 2 eee eee eee 35 3 4 3 Data Formato ota herein tit cals ia ane ee eee es A 36 3 5 Using a Memory Unit Vj Versions 0 00 eee eee eee eee eee 36 3 5 1 Installation Method 0 eee eee ee eee 37 3 5 2 Method ob Useren see panies ey we blewe Jena che tights eaten 38 3 6 Using a Memory Unit Versions without the Vj Suffix 00 44 3 6 1 Installation Method 0 0 cee eee eee 45 3 6 2 Method f Usen me nira n o DEn EIE ak Pen ee eaten 46 29 Installation Section 3 1 Note On unpacking the NT631 NT631C and peripheral devices check their external appearance and confirm that there is no damage Also confirm that there is no abnormal noise on shaking the unit lightly 3 1 Installation Install the NT631 NT631C in the operation p
326. turn on page 7 to 27 e Screen switching strobe e Numerals input strobe e Character string input strobe e The usable area for allocation is the PT memory only 1 5 2 Comparison between Direct Connection and Memory Link The major differences between the direct connection and the memory link are as follows 19 Communications Using Memory Links Section 1 5 1 2 3 1 In the memory link method the communication with the host should be car ried out by using commands Compared to the ordinal direct connection which can be used requiring almost no programs the memory link method requires a program that is necessary for interchange of commands This however gives advantages to the memory link method by using a large variety of functions available in the direct connections from major mod els such as a personal computer and a FA computer equipped with RS 232C RS 422A communication means allowing the PT to be suited for larger usage 2 Actual PCs have many kinds of areas where as PT memory is a single area with only one kind When creating screen data by using the memory link methods it is always necessary to allocate display parts in the PT memory For communication between the host and the PT by the memory link method and for handling screen display elements refer to the N731 NT31C NT631 NT631C Programmable Terminal Reference Manual 1 5 3 Memory Link Online Transfer Function 20 When memory link communications are be
327. u Menu Item Function Quit Clear the System Menu screen and return to the RUN mode screen Transmit Mode Display the Transmit Mode screen to allow transmission for screen data between the Support Tool and the NT631 NT631C For details on transmission of screen data refer to 6 6 Transmitting the Screen Data page 144 127 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 6 3 Menu Item Function Maintenance Mode Display the Maintenance Mode menu to allow system mainte nance of the NT631 NT631C and various NT631 NT631C settings Expansion Mode Display the Expansion Mode menu to allow selection of the expansion functions supported by the NT631 NT631C The following expansion functions are supported e Version Display Displays the version of system program the date it was created and the PT model For details refer to 6 14 Version Display e Programming Console Function Allows the NT631 NT631C to be used as a Programming Con sole for a CS1G CS1H CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z or SRM1 For details refer to 6 12 Programming Console Function e Device Monitor Function Allows the NT631 NT631C to change the PC s operating mode and display change the contents of words in a CS1G CS1H CPM1 CPM2A CPM2C CQM1 CQM1H C200HX HG HE Z or SRM1 For details refer to 6 13 Device Monitor Function in this manual or 2 16 Device Monitor Function in the Reference Manual Functions of the System
328. unction 20 126 Bef re Operatin t erria seta aae aa ent ios Wadd Maw tea ed ao ene wad 6 ai 21 Role and Operation of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 1 1 1 Role and Operation of the NT631 NT631C The NT631 NT631C is a sophisticated display unit programmable terminal which automatically displays information and can also be used for operations when necessary The following gives a general description of the role and opera tion of the NT631 NT631C for those using a programmable terminal PT for the first time 1 1 1 Operation of an NT631 NT631C at an FA Production Site Production Line Status Monitoring Directions to Workers on the Shop Floor Panel Switch Functions The NT631 NT631C displays real time information about the system and equip ment operating status etc Its power of expression is enhanced by graphs and other visuals making the displays easy to understand The NT631 NT631C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the ap propriate remedial action Assembly line B Positioning pin is defective Line stopped Check the following 1 Defective pin L3 2 Position of dog M2 3 Mounting of photosensor P5 Setting touch switches on the NT631 NT631C allows workers to use the NT631 NT631C as an operating panel the results of the operations are trans mitted to the host Electroplating control Electr Wash Corr prv head head
329. unication with the from the System Menu shown below Support Tool ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Oped lpr Hie Tia het Alama Hiabin pU witing Erre Deta biam m i LAY Chek Select I F Check Select Tool Comm bus The check on communication with the Sup port Tool starts Comrilodd the screen data etter comesting the host amc omm Port 4 4 a a HAAHR If communication with the Support Tool is normal data transmitted from the Sup port Tool is displayed as hexadecimal data when received by the NT631 NT631C 206 System Maintenance Section 6 11 Checking Communication at Serial Ports After confirming the result of the test press Quit The NT631 NT631C returns to the I F CHECK MENU screen Check communication at the serial ports A B Check Screen The check screen and check method differ according to the communication method set for the port to be checked For Host Link Example Serial port A while using the host link ET krack tha setting of man M Sed the LG Snd conmect the she PUG i t a Peri a Fees l Sending Cate FRAERAFREREAFPES F Fe FE FF F gt FF FF FF OFF FF FF FF FP Press Execute to start the check The data for checking communication is sent to the host and is displayed as the Sending Data in hexadecimal e f communication with the host is normal the reply from the host is
330. us control area PT window opening is set to 1 ON Set bit 6 to 0 OFF Refer to 2 2 7 PT Status Control Area Host lt gt PT in the Reference Manual for details Cannot switch screens with touch switches Bit 4 of the PT status control area PT screen switching is set to 1 ON Set bit 4 to 0 OFF Refer to 2 2 7 PT Status Control Area Host lt PT in the Reference Manual for details Touch switch does not work Buzzer sounds 224 The interlock function is set for the touch switch and the controlling interlock bit is OFF Touch switches are disabled when the corresponding interlock bit is OFF Check the status of the corresponding interlock bit and turn it ON Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 NT631 NT631C Symptoms Cause Remedy The display is dim Insufficient contrast or brightness 183 Increase the contrast brightness pages 181 and expired Backlight defective or its life has Replace the backlight page 232 The display is too faint The contrast is too high Reduce the contrast page 181 The digits in numeral display come out as The number of digits of a numeric value in a numeral memory table exceeds the set number e Confirm the values of the PC words allocated to the numeral memory table e Allocate one PC word to each numeral memory table 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages When
331. ut Communication Conditions 00000 6 7 2 Setting the Host Link Method 0 0000 6 7 3 Setting the NT Link 1 1 Method 0 0 2 00 085 6 7 4 Setting the NT Link 1 N Method Standard High speed 6 7 5 Setting the Memory Link Method 0 0 6 7 6 Setting the Communication Type for Serial Port B Starting Operations 2 8 sesh aa E ae oss de Soe Rw ase A E E S Various System Settings swiss desea Sas ba oe eee a UR ae ees 6 9 1 Memory Switch Setting Screens 0 00000000 6 9 2 Setting the Start up Wait Time 000000 6 9 3 Setting the Key Press Sound 0 0 00 00000005 6 9 4 Setting the Buzzer Sound 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 6 9 5 Setting the Printer Controller 00 0000 6 9 6 Setting the Print Method NT631C Only 04 51 52 76 81 82 84 88 92 94 95 112 115 116 118 120 121 125 126 126 127 127 128 129 131 131 133 134 136 137 138 140 140 140 142 143 144 147 147 150 152 152 155 157 158 158 159 159 160 161 162 164 Table of contents 6 9 7 Setting Screen Saver Movement 000 000005 165 6 9 8 Setting the Screen Saver Start up Time 0 166 6 9 9 Setting the History Display Method 0 168 6 9 10 Setting the Resume Function
332. ver while lightly pulling the fitting 0 5 Le 303 o8mm __ 30 Installation Section 3 1 Note Fittings at the two positions are not necessary if you do not need it dust proof and waterproof T 5 gt 1 During work at the panel take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1 6 mm to 4 8 mm All fittings must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m in order to ensure water and dust resistance Front sheet of NT631 NT631C may be warped if the tightening is too strong or not uniformity The panel must not be soiled or warped and must be able to support an installation that will remain se cure and strong 3 1 3 Power Supply Connection Note Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals 1 oOo ao fF W PY Depending on how the power is switched ON OFF the entire system may stop Follow the correct procedure when switching the power ON OFF Carefully check the wiring before switching ON the power Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation Do not perform a dielectric strength test If complying with EC directives low voltage directives the following points must be noted compliance with EC directives a Use a power supply with reinforced insulation b When installing NT631 ST211 B EV2 on th
333. wire with scissors Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire Fold back the shielding wire Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded back shielding wire Units mm inch Aluminum foil tape Cable with Shielding Wire Not Connected to FG 1 2 3 1 Cut the cable to the required length 2 Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath 3 Cut back the shielding wire with scissors 4 Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire 261 Making the Cable Appendix E 5 Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire Units mm inch Vinyl tape Soldering 1 2 3 1 Slide heat shrink tube over each wire 2 Pre solder each wire and connector terminal 3 Solder each wire to each connector terminal o u Soldering iron Heat shrink tube F 1 5 mm dia 10 mm 4 Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place Heat shrink tube Hood Assembly Assemble the connector hood as shown below Aluminum foil tape End connected to FG End not connected to FG 262 Appendix F Making the Cable for Connecting a PC Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the Support Tool Assembly of Connecting Cables Wiring should be carried out in one
334. witch the NT631 NT631C power OFF remove the memory unit To operate NT631 NT631C continuously switch the NT631 NT631C power back ON Writing Screen Data to In this mode the system program or screen data in the memory unit is forcibly the PT Using Automatic written to NT631 NT631C irrespective of the setting status of the Transmission Memory NT631 NT631C Unit to PT 40 Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the Support Tool or system installer is used it can save a lot of time When transmitting the same system program or screen data to multiple NT631 NT631C this mode becomes convenient Reference When data is written to the NT631 NT631C the data that has been stored up un til that point is lost When the system program is changed the operation of NT631 NT631C also changes Method of Execution Use the following procedure to write the screen data in the memory unit to the NT631 NT631C by automatic transmission 1 2 3 1 Check that the NT631 NT631C power is OFF then set the DIP switches on the memory unit as follows after installing memory unit to NT631 NT631C Wi S SW2 4 ON System Screen transmitted simultaneously OFF System Screen not transmitted simultaneously SW2 3 ON Bank 1 OFF Bank 0 SW1 4 ON System program OFF Screen data It is not strictly necessary to set SW2 2 to OFF to disable writing to the memory unit but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data
335. without displaying an error screen Re gardless of the setting made for Retry Counts attempts to re establish commu nication are repeated until normal communication is achieved Comm Auto return OFF The RUN mode is ended and an error screen is displayed On pressing the OK touch switch on the error screen the screen displayed immediately before is re displayed and attempts are made to re establish communication The System Menu can be displayed from the error screen by pressing any two of the four corners of the touch panel simultaneously The setting range is 0 to 255 times The default factory setting is 5 times Reference For details on communication errors refer to 7 2 5 Communication Errors and Their Remedies page 229 176 Setting the Bar Code Reader Input Function Section 6 10 Set the retry count by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press J next screen or 7 previous screen to display the third memory switch setting screen Set a number of times in the input field to the right of Retry Counts Each of the digits can be incremented or decremented by pressing the associated and keys To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the setti
336. y from oldest record or from newest record is set with the Hist Disp Method memory switch page 168 e The printing method and other information must be set in advance with the Printer Controller page 162 and Print Method page 164 memory switches Display and print the alarm history record data by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Alarm History Select Sort by Occurrence or Sort by Fre at j quency 191 System Maintenance Section 6 14 If necessary select the next or previous screen by pressing J next screen or T previous screen The example screen to the left shows a dis play for the sort by occurrence method from oldest record If required press Prt to print the display his tory record data Press Quit The NT631 NT631C returns to the ALARM HISTORY MENU screen Example Print out All of the recorded data is printed out in the same order as on the currently dis played screen Example Sort by occurrence method from oldest record Comment YY MM DD HH MM 01 01 Remote I O Error 98 02 06 16 02 PIC Unit Error 98 02 07 09 21 Cycle Time Over 98 02 17 15 44 6 11 6 Checking Screen Data The NT631 NT631C allows the registered screens Nos 1 to 3999 to be dis played and checked by operation from the System Menu Reference Window screens can
337. y into the allocation DM area system setting area of the CPU After the setting is written it becomes effective by turning the power ON restarting the unit restarting the communication port or execution of the STUP command In the following the channel numbers of the allocation DM area and settings are shown m DM30000 100 unit number CH Allocation DM area CH Port 1 Port 2 m m 10 8200 NT link 1 N mode m 1 m 11 0000 to 0009 1 Communications baud rate standard Writing Value Settings 000 The largest model number of the connected PT 0 7 m 6 m 16 1 Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is between 0000 and 0009 Hex Using the High speed NT Link 1 N Method Compatible Host Units Only the V1 versions of OMRON s CS1H and CS1G PCs support the high speed 1 N NT Link directly Other CS1 series PCs can use the high speed 1 N NT Link indirectly through a CS1W SCU21 Serial Communications Unit If a Serial Communications Unit is used even CS1 series Units without the V1 suffix can be connected via high speed 1 N NT Link Be sure to check the model number of the PC and Serial Communications Board Unit before trying to establish the high speed 1 N NT Link The following table shows which CS1 series PCs can be connected to an NT631 NT631C with the hi
338. y its cable or pull on the cable Do not subject the backlight to excessive force or shock e Do not disassemble the product to repair or modify it Replacing the Backlight Use the following procedure to replace the backlight ANA ZINIING Switch OFF the NT631C power before replacing the backlight Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock Replace the backlight by following the procedure given below NT631C CFLO01 for NT631C ST1511 EV2 Procedure 1 2 3 1 Turn the power supply to the NT631C OFF Be sure to do so to avoid an electric shock 2 Disconnect the terminal block wiring the communication cable and the printer cable If a memory unit or interface unit is mounted remove that unit also 3 Loosen four screws at corners on the rear face of the NT631C and remove the rear case Be careful not to lose these screws From this step on exert added care not to touch any electronic parts or printed circuit boards inside the unit Otherwise the PT may sustain static damage 232 Maintenance of the NT631 NT631C Section 7 3 4 Disengage two backlight connectors at the top and the bottom and pull out the touch panel cable Removing and Fitting The Touch Panel Cable Removing The Touch Panel Cable Pull the arrow marked sections up to the cable side to unlock the connector and remove the cable oo Fitting The Touch Panel Cable While unlocking the connector insert the touch
339. yed character strings can be changed by changing the data stored in the character string memory tables Numeral Input Numeric values can be input at the PT by using touch switches The input nu meric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the host Numeral inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit has been allocated 12345678 Window String Input Character strings can be input at the PT by using touch switches bar code read ers etc The input character strings can also be stored in a character string memory table and notified to the host String inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit has been allocated Character string setting input field Input NT631C NT631 NT31C Thumbwheel Switches Numeric values can be input by incrementing or decrementing each digit with the corresponding touch switch The input numeric values can also be stored in a numeral memory table and notified to the host 12 Functions of the NT631 NT631C Section 1 2 Graphs Thumbwheel switch inputs can be enabled and disabled from the host when an interlock bit has been allocated These are graphics whose display changes in accordance with the numeric val ues stored in numeral memory tables There are the following four types Bar graphs Bar graphs display the present value in a numeral memory table converted to a perce
340. ys tem Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press Start up Wait Time to display the re quired time lapse The setting option changes each time the touch switch is pressed according to the fol lowing sequence 01 02 03 09 10 00 01 To set other memory switches select the relevant screen using the next screen or previous screen touch switch then make the setting e To confirm the settings and quit the memory switch setting screen press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen e To quit the memory switch setting screen without confirming the settings press the Abort touch switch The NT631 NT631C will return to the MAINTENANCE MODE MENU screen with the previous settings still in effect 6 9 3 Setting the Key Press Sound It is possible to set whether or not the key sound is sounded when a touch switch on the NT631 NT631C screen is pressed e ON When a touch switch is pressed the key sound sounds for 0 2 seconds e OFF The key sound does not sound when touch switches are pressed The default factory setting is ON 160 Various System Settings Section 6 9 Set the key press sound by following the menu operation from the System Menu shown below Ver 3 10 Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Press Key Press Soun

Setup Manual NT631 and NT631C - Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents